Commit bec8c647bc263d80040413a09f54751bc27c9d31

Authored by Alex Kiernan
Committed by Tom Rini
1 parent 8981433f4d

Integrate AT91 bootcount driver

Integrate Boot counter for Atmel AT91SAM9XE into Kconfig

Reviewed-by: Lukasz Majewski <lukma@denx.de>
Signed-off-by: Alex Kiernan <alex.kiernan@gmail.com>

Showing 3 changed files with 6 additions and 5 deletions Inline Diff

1 # 1 #
2 # (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013 2 # (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013
3 # Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de. 3 # Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de.
4 # 4 #
5 # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 5 # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
6 # 6 #
7 7
8 Summary: 8 Summary:
9 ======== 9 ========
10 10
11 This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for 11 This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for
12 Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other 12 Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other
13 processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to 13 processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to
14 initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application 14 initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application
15 code. 15 code.
16 16
17 The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of 17 The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of
18 the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some 18 the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some
19 header files in common, and special provision has been made to 19 header files in common, and special provision has been made to
20 support booting of Linux images. 20 support booting of Linux images.
21 21
22 Some attention has been paid to make this software easily 22 Some attention has been paid to make this software easily
23 configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are 23 configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are
24 implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to 24 implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to
25 add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used 25 add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used
26 code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can 26 code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can
27 load and run it dynamically. 27 load and run it dynamically.
28 28
29 29
30 Status: 30 Status:
31 ======= 31 =======
32 32
33 In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the 33 In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the
34 Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered 34 Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered
35 "working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems. 35 "working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems.
36 36
37 In case of problems see the CHANGELOG file to find out who contributed 37 In case of problems see the CHANGELOG file to find out who contributed
38 the specific port. In addition, there are various MAINTAINERS files 38 the specific port. In addition, there are various MAINTAINERS files
39 scattered throughout the U-Boot source identifying the people or 39 scattered throughout the U-Boot source identifying the people or
40 companies responsible for various boards and subsystems. 40 companies responsible for various boards and subsystems.
41 41
42 Note: As of August, 2010, there is no longer a CHANGELOG file in the 42 Note: As of August, 2010, there is no longer a CHANGELOG file in the
43 actual U-Boot source tree; however, it can be created dynamically 43 actual U-Boot source tree; however, it can be created dynamically
44 from the Git log using: 44 from the Git log using:
45 45
46 make CHANGELOG 46 make CHANGELOG
47 47
48 48
49 Where to get help: 49 Where to get help:
50 ================== 50 ==================
51 51
52 In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for 52 In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for
53 U-Boot, you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at 53 U-Boot, you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at
54 <u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic 54 <u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic
55 on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's. 55 on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's.
56 Please see http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and 56 Please see http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and
57 http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.boot-loaders.u-boot 57 http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.boot-loaders.u-boot
58 58
59 59
60 Where to get source code: 60 Where to get source code:
61 ========================= 61 =========================
62 62
63 The U-Boot source code is maintained in the Git repository at 63 The U-Boot source code is maintained in the Git repository at
64 git://www.denx.de/git/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at 64 git://www.denx.de/git/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at
65 http://www.denx.de/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=u-boot.git;a=summary 65 http://www.denx.de/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=u-boot.git;a=summary
66 66
67 The "snapshot" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of 67 The "snapshot" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of
68 any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also 68 any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also
69 available for FTP download from the ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ 69 available for FTP download from the ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/
70 directory. 70 directory.
71 71
72 Pre-built (and tested) images are available from 72 Pre-built (and tested) images are available from
73 ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/images/ 73 ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/images/
74 74
75 75
76 Where we come from: 76 Where we come from:
77 =================== 77 ===================
78 78
79 - start from 8xxrom sources 79 - start from 8xxrom sources
80 - create PPCBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot) 80 - create PPCBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot)
81 - clean up code 81 - clean up code
82 - make it easier to add custom boards 82 - make it easier to add custom boards
83 - make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs 83 - make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs
84 - extend functions, especially: 84 - extend functions, especially:
85 * Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader 85 * Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader
86 * S-Record download 86 * S-Record download
87 * network boot 87 * network boot
88 * PCMCIA / CompactFlash / ATA disk / SCSI ... boot 88 * PCMCIA / CompactFlash / ATA disk / SCSI ... boot
89 - create ARMBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot) 89 - create ARMBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot)
90 - add other CPU families (starting with ARM) 90 - add other CPU families (starting with ARM)
91 - create U-Boot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot) 91 - create U-Boot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot)
92 - current project page: see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot 92 - current project page: see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot
93 93
94 94
95 Names and Spelling: 95 Names and Spelling:
96 =================== 96 ===================
97 97
98 The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling 98 The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling
99 "U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments 99 "U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments
100 in source files etc.). Example: 100 in source files etc.). Example:
101 101
102 This is the README file for the U-Boot project. 102 This is the README file for the U-Boot project.
103 103
104 File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples: 104 File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples:
105 105
106 include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h 106 include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h
107 107
108 #include <asm/u-boot.h> 108 #include <asm/u-boot.h>
109 109
110 Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on 110 Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on
111 the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example: 111 the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example:
112 112
113 U_BOOT_VERSION u_boot_logo 113 U_BOOT_VERSION u_boot_logo
114 IH_OS_U_BOOT u_boot_hush_start 114 IH_OS_U_BOOT u_boot_hush_start
115 115
116 116
117 Versioning: 117 Versioning:
118 =========== 118 ===========
119 119
120 Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases 120 Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases
121 were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning 121 were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning
122 into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by 122 into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by
123 names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date. 123 names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date.
124 Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix 124 Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix
125 releases in "stable" maintenance trees. 125 releases in "stable" maintenance trees.
126 126
127 Examples: 127 Examples:
128 U-Boot v2009.11 - Release November 2009 128 U-Boot v2009.11 - Release November 2009
129 U-Boot v2009.11.1 - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree 129 U-Boot v2009.11.1 - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree
130 U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candidate 1 for September 2010 release 130 U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candidate 1 for September 2010 release
131 131
132 132
133 Directory Hierarchy: 133 Directory Hierarchy:
134 ==================== 134 ====================
135 135
136 /arch Architecture specific files 136 /arch Architecture specific files
137 /arc Files generic to ARC architecture 137 /arc Files generic to ARC architecture
138 /arm Files generic to ARM architecture 138 /arm Files generic to ARM architecture
139 /m68k Files generic to m68k architecture 139 /m68k Files generic to m68k architecture
140 /microblaze Files generic to microblaze architecture 140 /microblaze Files generic to microblaze architecture
141 /mips Files generic to MIPS architecture 141 /mips Files generic to MIPS architecture
142 /nds32 Files generic to NDS32 architecture 142 /nds32 Files generic to NDS32 architecture
143 /nios2 Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture 143 /nios2 Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture
144 /openrisc Files generic to OpenRISC architecture 144 /openrisc Files generic to OpenRISC architecture
145 /powerpc Files generic to PowerPC architecture 145 /powerpc Files generic to PowerPC architecture
146 /riscv Files generic to RISC-V architecture 146 /riscv Files generic to RISC-V architecture
147 /sandbox Files generic to HW-independent "sandbox" 147 /sandbox Files generic to HW-independent "sandbox"
148 /sh Files generic to SH architecture 148 /sh Files generic to SH architecture
149 /x86 Files generic to x86 architecture 149 /x86 Files generic to x86 architecture
150 /api Machine/arch independent API for external apps 150 /api Machine/arch independent API for external apps
151 /board Board dependent files 151 /board Board dependent files
152 /cmd U-Boot commands functions 152 /cmd U-Boot commands functions
153 /common Misc architecture independent functions 153 /common Misc architecture independent functions
154 /configs Board default configuration files 154 /configs Board default configuration files
155 /disk Code for disk drive partition handling 155 /disk Code for disk drive partition handling
156 /doc Documentation (don't expect too much) 156 /doc Documentation (don't expect too much)
157 /drivers Commonly used device drivers 157 /drivers Commonly used device drivers
158 /dts Contains Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt. 158 /dts Contains Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt.
159 /examples Example code for standalone applications, etc. 159 /examples Example code for standalone applications, etc.
160 /fs Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.) 160 /fs Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.)
161 /include Header Files 161 /include Header Files
162 /lib Library routines generic to all architectures 162 /lib Library routines generic to all architectures
163 /Licenses Various license files 163 /Licenses Various license files
164 /net Networking code 164 /net Networking code
165 /post Power On Self Test 165 /post Power On Self Test
166 /scripts Various build scripts and Makefiles 166 /scripts Various build scripts and Makefiles
167 /test Various unit test files 167 /test Various unit test files
168 /tools Tools to build S-Record or U-Boot images, etc. 168 /tools Tools to build S-Record or U-Boot images, etc.
169 169
170 Software Configuration: 170 Software Configuration:
171 ======================= 171 =======================
172 172
173 Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the 173 Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the
174 rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible. 174 rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible.
175 175
176 There are two classes of configuration variables: 176 There are two classes of configuration variables:
177 177
178 * Configuration _OPTIONS_: 178 * Configuration _OPTIONS_:
179 These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with 179 These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with
180 "CONFIG_". 180 "CONFIG_".
181 181
182 * Configuration _SETTINGS_: 182 * Configuration _SETTINGS_:
183 These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if 183 These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if
184 you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with 184 you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with
185 "CONFIG_SYS_". 185 "CONFIG_SYS_".
186 186
187 Previously, all configuration was done by hand, which involved creating 187 Previously, all configuration was done by hand, which involved creating
188 symbolic links and editing configuration files manually. More recently, 188 symbolic links and editing configuration files manually. More recently,
189 U-Boot has added the Kbuild infrastructure used by the Linux kernel, 189 U-Boot has added the Kbuild infrastructure used by the Linux kernel,
190 allowing you to use the "make menuconfig" command to configure your 190 allowing you to use the "make menuconfig" command to configure your
191 build. 191 build.
192 192
193 193
194 Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type: 194 Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type:
195 --------------------------------------------------- 195 ---------------------------------------------------
196 196
197 For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default 197 For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default
198 configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig". 198 configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig".
199 199
200 Example: For a TQM823L module type: 200 Example: For a TQM823L module type:
201 201
202 cd u-boot 202 cd u-boot
203 make TQM823L_defconfig 203 make TQM823L_defconfig
204 204
205 Note: If you're looking for the default configuration file for a board 205 Note: If you're looking for the default configuration file for a board
206 you're sure used to be there but is now missing, check the file 206 you're sure used to be there but is now missing, check the file
207 doc/README.scrapyard for a list of no longer supported boards. 207 doc/README.scrapyard for a list of no longer supported boards.
208 208
209 Sandbox Environment: 209 Sandbox Environment:
210 -------------------- 210 --------------------
211 211
212 U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox' 212 U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox'
213 board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture- 213 board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture-
214 specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to 214 specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to
215 run some of U-Boot's tests. 215 run some of U-Boot's tests.
216 216
217 See board/sandbox/README.sandbox for more details. 217 See board/sandbox/README.sandbox for more details.
218 218
219 219
220 Board Initialisation Flow: 220 Board Initialisation Flow:
221 -------------------------- 221 --------------------------
222 222
223 This is the intended start-up flow for boards. This should apply for both 223 This is the intended start-up flow for boards. This should apply for both
224 SPL and U-Boot proper (i.e. they both follow the same rules). 224 SPL and U-Boot proper (i.e. they both follow the same rules).
225 225
226 Note: "SPL" stands for "Secondary Program Loader," which is explained in 226 Note: "SPL" stands for "Secondary Program Loader," which is explained in
227 more detail later in this file. 227 more detail later in this file.
228 228
229 At present, SPL mostly uses a separate code path, but the function names 229 At present, SPL mostly uses a separate code path, but the function names
230 and roles of each function are the same. Some boards or architectures 230 and roles of each function are the same. Some boards or architectures
231 may not conform to this. At least most ARM boards which use 231 may not conform to this. At least most ARM boards which use
232 CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK conform to this. 232 CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK conform to this.
233 233
234 Execution typically starts with an architecture-specific (and possibly 234 Execution typically starts with an architecture-specific (and possibly
235 CPU-specific) start.S file, such as: 235 CPU-specific) start.S file, such as:
236 236
237 - arch/arm/cpu/armv7/start.S 237 - arch/arm/cpu/armv7/start.S
238 - arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc83xx/start.S 238 - arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc83xx/start.S
239 - arch/mips/cpu/start.S 239 - arch/mips/cpu/start.S
240 240
241 and so on. From there, three functions are called; the purpose and 241 and so on. From there, three functions are called; the purpose and
242 limitations of each of these functions are described below. 242 limitations of each of these functions are described below.
243 243
244 lowlevel_init(): 244 lowlevel_init():
245 - purpose: essential init to permit execution to reach board_init_f() 245 - purpose: essential init to permit execution to reach board_init_f()
246 - no global_data or BSS 246 - no global_data or BSS
247 - there is no stack (ARMv7 may have one but it will soon be removed) 247 - there is no stack (ARMv7 may have one but it will soon be removed)
248 - must not set up SDRAM or use console 248 - must not set up SDRAM or use console
249 - must only do the bare minimum to allow execution to continue to 249 - must only do the bare minimum to allow execution to continue to
250 board_init_f() 250 board_init_f()
251 - this is almost never needed 251 - this is almost never needed
252 - return normally from this function 252 - return normally from this function
253 253
254 board_init_f(): 254 board_init_f():
255 - purpose: set up the machine ready for running board_init_r(): 255 - purpose: set up the machine ready for running board_init_r():
256 i.e. SDRAM and serial UART 256 i.e. SDRAM and serial UART
257 - global_data is available 257 - global_data is available
258 - stack is in SRAM 258 - stack is in SRAM
259 - BSS is not available, so you cannot use global/static variables, 259 - BSS is not available, so you cannot use global/static variables,
260 only stack variables and global_data 260 only stack variables and global_data
261 261
262 Non-SPL-specific notes: 262 Non-SPL-specific notes:
263 - dram_init() is called to set up DRAM. If already done in SPL this 263 - dram_init() is called to set up DRAM. If already done in SPL this
264 can do nothing 264 can do nothing
265 265
266 SPL-specific notes: 266 SPL-specific notes:
267 - you can override the entire board_init_f() function with your own 267 - you can override the entire board_init_f() function with your own
268 version as needed. 268 version as needed.
269 - preloader_console_init() can be called here in extremis 269 - preloader_console_init() can be called here in extremis
270 - should set up SDRAM, and anything needed to make the UART work 270 - should set up SDRAM, and anything needed to make the UART work
271 - these is no need to clear BSS, it will be done by crt0.S 271 - these is no need to clear BSS, it will be done by crt0.S
272 - must return normally from this function (don't call board_init_r() 272 - must return normally from this function (don't call board_init_r()
273 directly) 273 directly)
274 274
275 Here the BSS is cleared. For SPL, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined, then at 275 Here the BSS is cleared. For SPL, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined, then at
276 this point the stack and global_data are relocated to below 276 this point the stack and global_data are relocated to below
277 CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR. For non-SPL, U-Boot is relocated to run at the top of 277 CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR. For non-SPL, U-Boot is relocated to run at the top of
278 memory. 278 memory.
279 279
280 board_init_r(): 280 board_init_r():
281 - purpose: main execution, common code 281 - purpose: main execution, common code
282 - global_data is available 282 - global_data is available
283 - SDRAM is available 283 - SDRAM is available
284 - BSS is available, all static/global variables can be used 284 - BSS is available, all static/global variables can be used
285 - execution eventually continues to main_loop() 285 - execution eventually continues to main_loop()
286 286
287 Non-SPL-specific notes: 287 Non-SPL-specific notes:
288 - U-Boot is relocated to the top of memory and is now running from 288 - U-Boot is relocated to the top of memory and is now running from
289 there. 289 there.
290 290
291 SPL-specific notes: 291 SPL-specific notes:
292 - stack is optionally in SDRAM, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined and 292 - stack is optionally in SDRAM, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined and
293 CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR points into SDRAM 293 CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR points into SDRAM
294 - preloader_console_init() can be called here - typically this is 294 - preloader_console_init() can be called here - typically this is
295 done by selecting CONFIG_SPL_BOARD_INIT and then supplying a 295 done by selecting CONFIG_SPL_BOARD_INIT and then supplying a
296 spl_board_init() function containing this call 296 spl_board_init() function containing this call
297 - loads U-Boot or (in falcon mode) Linux 297 - loads U-Boot or (in falcon mode) Linux
298 298
299 299
300 300
301 Configuration Options: 301 Configuration Options:
302 ---------------------- 302 ----------------------
303 303
304 Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all 304 Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all
305 such information is kept in a configuration file 305 such information is kept in a configuration file
306 "include/configs/<board_name>.h". 306 "include/configs/<board_name>.h".
307 307
308 Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in 308 Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in
309 "include/configs/TQM823L.h". 309 "include/configs/TQM823L.h".
310 310
311 311
312 Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux 312 Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux
313 kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to 313 kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to
314 build a config tool - later. 314 build a config tool - later.
315 315
316 - ARM Platform Bus Type(CCI): 316 - ARM Platform Bus Type(CCI):
317 CoreLink Cache Coherent Interconnect (CCI) is ARM BUS which 317 CoreLink Cache Coherent Interconnect (CCI) is ARM BUS which
318 provides full cache coherency between two clusters of multi-core 318 provides full cache coherency between two clusters of multi-core
319 CPUs and I/O coherency for devices and I/O masters 319 CPUs and I/O coherency for devices and I/O masters
320 320
321 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCI400 321 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCI400
322 322
323 Defined For SoC that has cache coherent interconnect 323 Defined For SoC that has cache coherent interconnect
324 CCN-400 324 CCN-400
325 325
326 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCN504 326 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCN504
327 327
328 Defined for SoC that has cache coherent interconnect CCN-504 328 Defined for SoC that has cache coherent interconnect CCN-504
329 329
330 The following options need to be configured: 330 The following options need to be configured:
331 331
332 - CPU Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX. 332 - CPU Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX.
333 333
334 - Board Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS. 334 - Board Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS.
335 335
336 - Marvell Family Member 336 - Marvell Family Member
337 CONFIG_SYS_MVFS - define it if you want to enable 337 CONFIG_SYS_MVFS - define it if you want to enable
338 multiple fs option at one time 338 multiple fs option at one time
339 for marvell soc family 339 for marvell soc family
340 340
341 - 85xx CPU Options: 341 - 85xx CPU Options:
342 CONFIG_SYS_PPC64 342 CONFIG_SYS_PPC64
343 343
344 Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements 344 Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements
345 the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR 345 the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR
346 compliance, among other possible reasons. 346 compliance, among other possible reasons.
347 347
348 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV 348 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV
349 349
350 Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the 350 Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the
351 system clock. On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ 351 system clock. On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ
352 devices it can be 16 or 32. The ratio varies from SoC to Soc. 352 devices it can be 16 or 32. The ratio varies from SoC to Soc.
353 353
354 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT 354 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT
355 355
356 Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device 356 Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device
357 tree nodes for the given platform. 357 tree nodes for the given platform.
358 358
359 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 359 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510
360 360
361 Enables a workaround for erratum A004510. If set, 361 Enables a workaround for erratum A004510. If set,
362 then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and 362 then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and
363 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set. 363 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set.
364 364
365 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV 365 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV
366 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional) 366 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional)
367 367
368 Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR) 368 Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR)
369 for which the A004510 workaround should be applied. 369 for which the A004510 workaround should be applied.
370 370
371 The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision 371 The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision
372 of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus 372 of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus
373 p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls 373 p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls
374 whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set. 374 whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set.
375 375
376 See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about 376 See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about
377 this erratum. 377 this erratum.
378 378
379 CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND 379 CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND
380 Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only 380 Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only
381 required during NOR boot. 381 required during NOR boot.
382 382
383 CONFIG_A008044_WORKAROUND 383 CONFIG_A008044_WORKAROUND
384 Enables a workaround for T1040/T1042 erratum A008044. It is only 384 Enables a workaround for T1040/T1042 erratum A008044. It is only
385 required during NAND boot and valid for Rev 1.0 SoC revision 385 required during NAND boot and valid for Rev 1.0 SoC revision
386 386
387 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY 387 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY
388 388
389 This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600 389 This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600
390 according to the A004510 workaround. 390 according to the A004510 workaround.
391 391
392 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR 392 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR
393 This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is 393 This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is
394 connected exclusively to the DSP cores. 394 connected exclusively to the DSP cores.
395 395
396 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR 396 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR
397 This value denotes start offset of M2 memory 397 This value denotes start offset of M2 memory
398 which is directly connected to the DSP core. 398 which is directly connected to the DSP core.
399 399
400 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR 400 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR
401 This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly 401 This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly
402 connected to the DSP core. 402 connected to the DSP core.
403 403
404 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT 404 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT
405 This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space. 405 This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space.
406 406
407 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK 407 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK
408 Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's. 408 Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's.
409 In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply 409 In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply
410 clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock. 410 clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock.
411 411
412 CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F 412 CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F
413 This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the 413 This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the
414 time of U-Boot entry and is required to be re-initialized. 414 time of U-Boot entry and is required to be re-initialized.
415 415
416 CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP 416 CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP
417 Indicates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is 417 Indicates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is
418 supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up. 418 supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up.
419 419
420 - Generic CPU options: 420 - Generic CPU options:
421 CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN 421 CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN
422 422
423 Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those 423 Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those
424 values is arch specific. 424 values is arch specific.
425 425
426 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR 426 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR
427 Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is 427 Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is
428 found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx, mpc86xx as well as some ARM core 428 found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx, mpc86xx as well as some ARM core
429 SoCs. 429 SoCs.
430 430
431 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR 431 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR
432 Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base. 432 Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base.
433 433
434 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU 434 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU
435 Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as 435 Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as
436 deskew training are not available. 436 deskew training are not available.
437 437
438 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1 438 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1
439 Freescale DDR1 controller. 439 Freescale DDR1 controller.
440 440
441 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2 441 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2
442 Freescale DDR2 controller. 442 Freescale DDR2 controller.
443 443
444 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3 444 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3
445 Freescale DDR3 controller. 445 Freescale DDR3 controller.
446 446
447 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4 447 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4
448 Freescale DDR4 controller. 448 Freescale DDR4 controller.
449 449
450 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3 450 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3
451 Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs. 451 Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs.
452 452
453 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1 453 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1
454 Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with 454 Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with
455 Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board 455 Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board
456 implemetation. 456 implemetation.
457 457
458 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2 458 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2
459 Board config to use DDR2. It can be enabled for SoCs with 459 Board config to use DDR2. It can be enabled for SoCs with
460 Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board 460 Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board
461 implementation. 461 implementation.
462 462
463 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3 463 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3
464 Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with 464 Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with
465 Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers. 465 Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers.
466 466
467 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L 467 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L
468 Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with 468 Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with
469 DDR3L controllers. 469 DDR3L controllers.
470 470
471 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR4 471 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR4
472 Board config to use DDR4. It can be enabled for SoCs with 472 Board config to use DDR4. It can be enabled for SoCs with
473 DDR4 controllers. 473 DDR4 controllers.
474 474
475 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE 475 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE
476 Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian 476 Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian
477 477
478 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE 478 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE
479 Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian 479 Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian
480 480
481 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_CLK_DIV 481 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_CLK_DIV
482 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to IFC controller). 482 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to IFC controller).
483 483
484 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_LBC_CLK_DIV 484 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_LBC_CLK_DIV
485 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to eLBC controller). 485 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to eLBC controller).
486 486
487 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_PBI 487 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_PBI
488 It enables addition of RCW (Power on reset configuration) in built image. 488 It enables addition of RCW (Power on reset configuration) in built image.
489 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details 489 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details
490 490
491 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_RCW 491 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_RCW
492 It adds PBI(pre-boot instructions) commands in u-boot build image. 492 It adds PBI(pre-boot instructions) commands in u-boot build image.
493 PBI commands can be used to configure SoC before it starts the execution. 493 PBI commands can be used to configure SoC before it starts the execution.
494 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details 494 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details
495 495
496 CONFIG_SPL_FSL_PBL 496 CONFIG_SPL_FSL_PBL
497 It adds a target to create boot binary having SPL binary in PBI format 497 It adds a target to create boot binary having SPL binary in PBI format
498 concatenated with u-boot binary. 498 concatenated with u-boot binary.
499 499
500 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE 500 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE
501 Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian 501 Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian
502 502
503 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE 503 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE
504 Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian 504 Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian
505 505
506 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY 506 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY
507 Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the 507 Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the
508 same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for all Power SoCs. But 508 same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for all Power SoCs. But
509 it could be different for ARM SoCs. 509 it could be different for ARM SoCs.
510 510
511 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B 511 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B
512 DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special 512 DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special
513 interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape 513 interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape
514 SoCs with ARM core. 514 SoCs with ARM core.
515 515
516 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS 516 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS
517 Number of controllers used as main memory. 517 Number of controllers used as main memory.
518 518
519 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS 519 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS
520 Number of controllers used for other than main memory. 520 Number of controllers used for other than main memory.
521 521
522 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_DP_DDR 522 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_DP_DDR
523 Defines the SoC has DP-DDR used for DPAA. 523 Defines the SoC has DP-DDR used for DPAA.
524 524
525 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE 525 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE
526 Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian 526 Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian
527 527
528 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE 528 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE
529 Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian 529 Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian
530 530
531 - MIPS CPU options: 531 - MIPS CPU options:
532 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET 532 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET
533 533
534 Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack 534 Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack
535 pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before 535 pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before
536 relocation. 536 relocation.
537 537
538 CONFIG_SYS_MIPS_CACHE_MODE 538 CONFIG_SYS_MIPS_CACHE_MODE
539 539
540 Cache operation mode for the MIPS CPU. 540 Cache operation mode for the MIPS CPU.
541 See also arch/mips/include/asm/mipsregs.h. 541 See also arch/mips/include/asm/mipsregs.h.
542 Possible values are: 542 Possible values are:
543 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NO_WA 543 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NO_WA
544 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_WA 544 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_WA
545 CONF_CM_UNCACHED 545 CONF_CM_UNCACHED
546 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NONCOHERENT 546 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NONCOHERENT
547 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CE 547 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CE
548 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_COW 548 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_COW
549 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CUW 549 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CUW
550 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_ACCELERATED 550 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_ACCELERATED
551 551
552 CONFIG_SYS_XWAY_EBU_BOOTCFG 552 CONFIG_SYS_XWAY_EBU_BOOTCFG
553 553
554 Special option for Lantiq XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. 554 Special option for Lantiq XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash.
555 See also arch/mips/cpu/mips32/start.S. 555 See also arch/mips/cpu/mips32/start.S.
556 556
557 CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES 557 CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES
558 558
559 Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq 559 Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq
560 XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to 560 XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to
561 be swapped if a flash programmer is used. 561 be swapped if a flash programmer is used.
562 562
563 - ARM options: 563 - ARM options:
564 CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH 564 CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH
565 565
566 Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not 566 Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not
567 clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15. 567 clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15.
568 568
569 COUNTER_FREQUENCY 569 COUNTER_FREQUENCY
570 Generic timer clock source frequency. 570 Generic timer clock source frequency.
571 571
572 COUNTER_FREQUENCY_REAL 572 COUNTER_FREQUENCY_REAL
573 Generic timer clock source frequency if the real clock is 573 Generic timer clock source frequency if the real clock is
574 different from COUNTER_FREQUENCY, and can only be determined 574 different from COUNTER_FREQUENCY, and can only be determined
575 at run time. 575 at run time.
576 576
577 - Tegra SoC options: 577 - Tegra SoC options:
578 CONFIG_TEGRA_SUPPORT_NON_SECURE 578 CONFIG_TEGRA_SUPPORT_NON_SECURE
579 579
580 Support executing U-Boot in non-secure (NS) mode. Certain 580 Support executing U-Boot in non-secure (NS) mode. Certain
581 impossible actions will be skipped if the CPU is in NS mode, 581 impossible actions will be skipped if the CPU is in NS mode,
582 such as ARM architectural timer initialization. 582 such as ARM architectural timer initialization.
583 583
584 - Linux Kernel Interface: 584 - Linux Kernel Interface:
585 CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ 585 CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ
586 586
587 U-Boot stores all clock information in Hz 587 U-Boot stores all clock information in Hz
588 internally. For binary compatibility with older Linux 588 internally. For binary compatibility with older Linux
589 kernels (which expect the clocks passed in the 589 kernels (which expect the clocks passed in the
590 bd_info data to be in MHz) the environment variable 590 bd_info data to be in MHz) the environment variable
591 "clocks_in_mhz" can be defined so that U-Boot 591 "clocks_in_mhz" can be defined so that U-Boot
592 converts clock data to MHZ before passing it to the 592 converts clock data to MHZ before passing it to the
593 Linux kernel. 593 Linux kernel.
594 When CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ is defined, a definition of 594 When CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ is defined, a definition of
595 "clocks_in_mhz=1" is automatically included in the 595 "clocks_in_mhz=1" is automatically included in the
596 default environment. 596 default environment.
597 597
598 CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES [relevant for MIPS only] 598 CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES [relevant for MIPS only]
599 599
600 When transferring memsize parameter to Linux, some versions 600 When transferring memsize parameter to Linux, some versions
601 expect it to be in bytes, others in MB. 601 expect it to be in bytes, others in MB.
602 Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes. 602 Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes.
603 603
604 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT 604 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
605 605
606 New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be 606 New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be
607 passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware 607 passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware
608 concepts). 608 concepts).
609 609
610 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT 610 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
611 * New libfdt-based support 611 * New libfdt-based support
612 * Adds the "fdt" command 612 * Adds the "fdt" command
613 * The bootm command automatically updates the fdt 613 * The bootm command automatically updates the fdt
614 614
615 OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency. 615 OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency.
616 OF_STDOUT_PATH - The path to the console device 616 OF_STDOUT_PATH - The path to the console device
617 617
618 boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC 618 boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC
619 addresses 619 addresses
620 620
621 CONFIG_OF_BOARD_SETUP 621 CONFIG_OF_BOARD_SETUP
622 622
623 Board code has addition modification that it wants to make 623 Board code has addition modification that it wants to make
624 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel 624 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel
625 625
626 CONFIG_OF_SYSTEM_SETUP 626 CONFIG_OF_SYSTEM_SETUP
627 627
628 Other code has addition modification that it wants to make 628 Other code has addition modification that it wants to make
629 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel. 629 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel.
630 This causes ft_system_setup() to be called before booting 630 This causes ft_system_setup() to be called before booting
631 the kernel. 631 the kernel.
632 632
633 CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP 633 CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP
634 634
635 U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not. 635 U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not.
636 If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot 636 If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot
637 removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux, 637 removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux,
638 so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and 638 so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and
639 crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where 639 crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where
640 no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7. 640 no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7.
641 641
642 CONFIG_MACH_TYPE [relevant for ARM only][mandatory] 642 CONFIG_MACH_TYPE [relevant for ARM only][mandatory]
643 643
644 This setting is mandatory for all boards that have only one 644 This setting is mandatory for all boards that have only one
645 machine type and must be used to specify the machine type 645 machine type and must be used to specify the machine type
646 number as it appears in the ARM machine registry 646 number as it appears in the ARM machine registry
647 (see http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/). 647 (see http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/).
648 Only boards that have multiple machine types supported 648 Only boards that have multiple machine types supported
649 in a single configuration file and the machine type is 649 in a single configuration file and the machine type is
650 runtime discoverable, do not have to use this setting. 650 runtime discoverable, do not have to use this setting.
651 651
652 - vxWorks boot parameters: 652 - vxWorks boot parameters:
653 653
654 bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following 654 bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following
655 environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask, 655 environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask,
656 serverip, gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs. 656 serverip, gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs.
657 It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile. 657 It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile.
658 658
659 Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will overwride 659 Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will overwride
660 the defaults discussed just above. 660 the defaults discussed just above.
661 661
662 - Cache Configuration: 662 - Cache Configuration:
663 CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF - Do not enable instruction cache in U-Boot 663 CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF - Do not enable instruction cache in U-Boot
664 CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF - Do not enable data cache in U-Boot 664 CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF - Do not enable data cache in U-Boot
665 CONFIG_SYS_L2CACHE_OFF- Do not enable L2 cache in U-Boot 665 CONFIG_SYS_L2CACHE_OFF- Do not enable L2 cache in U-Boot
666 666
667 - Cache Configuration for ARM: 667 - Cache Configuration for ARM:
668 CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache 668 CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache
669 controller 669 controller
670 CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310 670 CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310
671 controller register space 671 controller register space
672 672
673 - Serial Ports: 673 - Serial Ports:
674 CONFIG_PL010_SERIAL 674 CONFIG_PL010_SERIAL
675 675
676 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL010 UARTs. 676 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL010 UARTs.
677 677
678 CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL 678 CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL
679 679
680 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs. 680 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs.
681 681
682 CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK 682 CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK
683 683
684 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to 684 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to
685 the clock speed of the UARTs. 685 the clock speed of the UARTs.
686 686
687 CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS 687 CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS
688 688
689 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board, 689 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board,
690 define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported) 690 define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported)
691 port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h 691 port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h
692 692
693 CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL 693 CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL
694 694
695 Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver. 695 Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver.
696 Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver 696 Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver
697 697
698 - Console Baudrate: 698 - Console Baudrate:
699 CONFIG_BAUDRATE - in bps 699 CONFIG_BAUDRATE - in bps
700 Select one of the baudrates listed in 700 Select one of the baudrates listed in
701 CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below. 701 CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below.
702 702
703 - Autoboot Command: 703 - Autoboot Command:
704 CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND 704 CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
705 Only needed when CONFIG_BOOTDELAY is enabled; 705 Only needed when CONFIG_BOOTDELAY is enabled;
706 define a command string that is automatically executed 706 define a command string that is automatically executed
707 when no character is read on the console interface 707 when no character is read on the console interface
708 within "Boot Delay" after reset. 708 within "Boot Delay" after reset.
709 709
710 CONFIG_RAMBOOT and CONFIG_NFSBOOT 710 CONFIG_RAMBOOT and CONFIG_NFSBOOT
711 The value of these goes into the environment as 711 The value of these goes into the environment as
712 "ramboot" and "nfsboot" respectively, and can be used 712 "ramboot" and "nfsboot" respectively, and can be used
713 as a convenience, when switching between booting from 713 as a convenience, when switching between booting from
714 RAM and NFS. 714 RAM and NFS.
715 715
716 - Pre-Boot Commands: 716 - Pre-Boot Commands:
717 CONFIG_PREBOOT 717 CONFIG_PREBOOT
718 718
719 When this option is #defined, the existence of the 719 When this option is #defined, the existence of the
720 environment variable "preboot" will be checked 720 environment variable "preboot" will be checked
721 immediately before starting the CONFIG_BOOTDELAY 721 immediately before starting the CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
722 countdown and/or running the auto-boot command resp. 722 countdown and/or running the auto-boot command resp.
723 entering interactive mode. 723 entering interactive mode.
724 724
725 This feature is especially useful when "preboot" is 725 This feature is especially useful when "preboot" is
726 automatically generated or modified. For an example 726 automatically generated or modified. For an example
727 see the LWMON board specific code: here "preboot" is 727 see the LWMON board specific code: here "preboot" is
728 modified when the user holds down a certain 728 modified when the user holds down a certain
729 combination of keys on the (special) keyboard when 729 combination of keys on the (special) keyboard when
730 booting the systems 730 booting the systems
731 731
732 - Serial Download Echo Mode: 732 - Serial Download Echo Mode:
733 CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO 733 CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
734 If defined to 1, all characters received during a 734 If defined to 1, all characters received during a
735 serial download (using the "loads" command) are 735 serial download (using the "loads" command) are
736 echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal 736 echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal
737 emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take 737 emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take
738 time on others. This setting #define's the initial 738 time on others. This setting #define's the initial
739 value of the "loads_echo" environment variable. 739 value of the "loads_echo" environment variable.
740 740
741 - Kgdb Serial Baudrate: (if CONFIG_CMD_KGDB is defined) 741 - Kgdb Serial Baudrate: (if CONFIG_CMD_KGDB is defined)
742 CONFIG_KGDB_BAUDRATE 742 CONFIG_KGDB_BAUDRATE
743 Select one of the baudrates listed in 743 Select one of the baudrates listed in
744 CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below. 744 CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below.
745 745
746 - Removal of commands 746 - Removal of commands
747 If no commands are needed to boot, you can disable 747 If no commands are needed to boot, you can disable
748 CONFIG_CMDLINE to remove them. In this case, the command line 748 CONFIG_CMDLINE to remove them. In this case, the command line
749 will not be available, and when U-Boot wants to execute the 749 will not be available, and when U-Boot wants to execute the
750 boot command (on start-up) it will call board_run_command() 750 boot command (on start-up) it will call board_run_command()
751 instead. This can reduce image size significantly for very 751 instead. This can reduce image size significantly for very
752 simple boot procedures. 752 simple boot procedures.
753 753
754 - Regular expression support: 754 - Regular expression support:
755 CONFIG_REGEX 755 CONFIG_REGEX
756 If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against 756 If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against
757 the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library, 757 the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library,
758 which adds regex support to some commands, as for 758 which adds regex support to some commands, as for
759 example "env grep" and "setexpr". 759 example "env grep" and "setexpr".
760 760
761 - Device tree: 761 - Device tree:
762 CONFIG_OF_CONTROL 762 CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
763 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use a device tree 763 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use a device tree
764 to configure its devices, instead of relying on statically 764 to configure its devices, instead of relying on statically
765 compiled #defines in the board file. This option is 765 compiled #defines in the board file. This option is
766 experimental and only available on a few boards. The device 766 experimental and only available on a few boards. The device
767 tree is available in the global data as gd->fdt_blob. 767 tree is available in the global data as gd->fdt_blob.
768 768
769 U-Boot needs to get its device tree from somewhere. This can 769 U-Boot needs to get its device tree from somewhere. This can
770 be done using one of the three options below: 770 be done using one of the three options below:
771 771
772 CONFIG_OF_EMBED 772 CONFIG_OF_EMBED
773 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will embed a device tree 773 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will embed a device tree
774 binary in its image. This device tree file should be in the 774 binary in its image. This device tree file should be in the
775 board directory and called <soc>-<board>.dts. The binary file 775 board directory and called <soc>-<board>.dts. The binary file
776 is then picked up in board_init_f() and made available through 776 is then picked up in board_init_f() and made available through
777 the global data structure as gd->fdt_blob. 777 the global data structure as gd->fdt_blob.
778 778
779 CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE 779 CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE
780 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will build a device tree 780 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will build a device tree
781 binary. It will be called u-boot.dtb. Architecture-specific 781 binary. It will be called u-boot.dtb. Architecture-specific
782 code will locate it at run-time. Generally this works by: 782 code will locate it at run-time. Generally this works by:
783 783
784 cat u-boot.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin 784 cat u-boot.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin
785 785
786 and in fact, U-Boot does this for you, creating a file called 786 and in fact, U-Boot does this for you, creating a file called
787 u-boot-dtb.bin which is useful in the common case. You can 787 u-boot-dtb.bin which is useful in the common case. You can
788 still use the individual files if you need something more 788 still use the individual files if you need something more
789 exotic. 789 exotic.
790 790
791 CONFIG_OF_BOARD 791 CONFIG_OF_BOARD
792 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use the device tree 792 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use the device tree
793 provided by the board at runtime instead of embedding one with 793 provided by the board at runtime instead of embedding one with
794 the image. Only boards defining board_fdt_blob_setup() support 794 the image. Only boards defining board_fdt_blob_setup() support
795 this option (see include/fdtdec.h file). 795 this option (see include/fdtdec.h file).
796 796
797 - Watchdog: 797 - Watchdog:
798 CONFIG_WATCHDOG 798 CONFIG_WATCHDOG
799 If this variable is defined, it enables watchdog 799 If this variable is defined, it enables watchdog
800 support for the SoC. There must be support in the SoC 800 support for the SoC. There must be support in the SoC
801 specific code for a watchdog. For the 8xx 801 specific code for a watchdog. For the 8xx
802 CPUs, the SIU Watchdog feature is enabled in the SYPCR 802 CPUs, the SIU Watchdog feature is enabled in the SYPCR
803 register. When supported for a specific SoC is 803 register. When supported for a specific SoC is
804 available, then no further board specific code should 804 available, then no further board specific code should
805 be needed to use it. 805 be needed to use it.
806 806
807 CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG 807 CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG
808 When using a watchdog circuitry external to the used 808 When using a watchdog circuitry external to the used
809 SoC, then define this variable and provide board 809 SoC, then define this variable and provide board
810 specific code for the "hw_watchdog_reset" function. 810 specific code for the "hw_watchdog_reset" function.
811 811
812 CONFIG_AT91_HW_WDT_TIMEOUT 812 CONFIG_AT91_HW_WDT_TIMEOUT
813 specify the timeout in seconds. default 2 seconds. 813 specify the timeout in seconds. default 2 seconds.
814 814
815 - U-Boot Version: 815 - U-Boot Version:
816 CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE 816 CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE
817 If this variable is defined, an environment variable 817 If this variable is defined, an environment variable
818 named "ver" is created by U-Boot showing the U-Boot 818 named "ver" is created by U-Boot showing the U-Boot
819 version as printed by the "version" command. 819 version as printed by the "version" command.
820 Any change to this variable will be reverted at the 820 Any change to this variable will be reverted at the
821 next reset. 821 next reset.
822 822
823 - Real-Time Clock: 823 - Real-Time Clock:
824 824
825 When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC 825 When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC
826 has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the 826 has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the
827 following options: 827 following options:
828 828
829 CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563 - use Philips PCF8563 RTC 829 CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563 - use Philips PCF8563 RTC
830 CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX - use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC 830 CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX - use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC
831 CONFIG_RTC_MC146818 - use MC146818 RTC 831 CONFIG_RTC_MC146818 - use MC146818 RTC
832 CONFIG_RTC_DS1307 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC 832 CONFIG_RTC_DS1307 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC
833 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC 833 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC
834 CONFIG_RTC_DS1338 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC 834 CONFIG_RTC_DS1338 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC
835 CONFIG_RTC_DS1339 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC 835 CONFIG_RTC_DS1339 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC
836 CONFIG_RTC_DS164x - use Dallas DS164x RTC 836 CONFIG_RTC_DS164x - use Dallas DS164x RTC
837 CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208 - use Intersil ISL1208 RTC 837 CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208 - use Intersil ISL1208 RTC
838 CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900 - use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC 838 CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900 - use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC
839 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC - Turn off the OSC output for DS1337 839 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC - Turn off the OSC output for DS1337
840 CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR - enable trickle charger on 840 CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR - enable trickle charger on
841 RV3029 RTC. 841 RV3029 RTC.
842 842
843 Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface 843 Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface
844 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below. 844 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
845 845
846 - GPIO Support: 846 - GPIO Support:
847 CONFIG_PCA953X - use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO 847 CONFIG_PCA953X - use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO
848 848
849 The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of 849 The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of
850 chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of 850 chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of
851 pins supported by a particular chip. 851 pins supported by a particular chip.
852 852
853 Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface 853 Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface
854 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below. 854 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
855 855
856 - I/O tracing: 856 - I/O tracing:
857 When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O 857 When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O
858 accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out 858 accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out
859 to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is 859 to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is
860 useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that 860 useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that
861 the driver behaves the same way before and after a code 861 the driver behaves the same way before and after a code
862 change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To 862 change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To
863 add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>' 863 add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>'
864 to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test. 864 to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test.
865 865
866 Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below. 866 Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below.
867 Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will 867 Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will
868 still continue to operate. 868 still continue to operate.
869 869
870 iotrace is enabled 870 iotrace is enabled
871 Start: 10000000 (buffer start address) 871 Start: 10000000 (buffer start address)
872 Size: 00010000 (buffer size) 872 Size: 00010000 (buffer size)
873 Offset: 00000120 (current buffer offset) 873 Offset: 00000120 (current buffer offset)
874 Output: 10000120 (start + offset) 874 Output: 10000120 (start + offset)
875 Count: 00000018 (number of trace records) 875 Count: 00000018 (number of trace records)
876 CRC32: 9526fb66 (CRC32 of all trace records) 876 CRC32: 9526fb66 (CRC32 of all trace records)
877 877
878 - Timestamp Support: 878 - Timestamp Support:
879 879
880 When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp 880 When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp
881 (date and time) of an image is printed by image 881 (date and time) of an image is printed by image
882 commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is 882 commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is
883 automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE . 883 automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE .
884 884
885 - Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported: 885 - Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported:
886 Zero or more of the following: 886 Zero or more of the following:
887 CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION Apple's MacOS partition table. 887 CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION Apple's MacOS partition table.
888 CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc. 888 CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc.
889 CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION GPT partition table, common when EFI is the 889 CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION GPT partition table, common when EFI is the
890 bootloader. Note 2TB partition limit; see 890 bootloader. Note 2TB partition limit; see
891 disk/part_efi.c 891 disk/part_efi.c
892 CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS Memory Technology Device partition table. 892 CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS Memory Technology Device partition table.
893 893
894 If IDE or SCSI support is enabled (CONFIG_IDE or 894 If IDE or SCSI support is enabled (CONFIG_IDE or
895 CONFIG_SCSI) you must configure support for at 895 CONFIG_SCSI) you must configure support for at
896 least one non-MTD partition type as well. 896 least one non-MTD partition type as well.
897 897
898 - IDE Reset method: 898 - IDE Reset method:
899 CONFIG_IDE_RESET_ROUTINE - this is defined in several 899 CONFIG_IDE_RESET_ROUTINE - this is defined in several
900 board configurations files but used nowhere! 900 board configurations files but used nowhere!
901 901
902 CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will 902 CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will
903 be performed by calling the function 903 be performed by calling the function
904 ide_set_reset(int reset) 904 ide_set_reset(int reset)
905 which has to be defined in a board specific file 905 which has to be defined in a board specific file
906 906
907 - ATAPI Support: 907 - ATAPI Support:
908 CONFIG_ATAPI 908 CONFIG_ATAPI
909 909
910 Set this to enable ATAPI support. 910 Set this to enable ATAPI support.
911 911
912 - LBA48 Support 912 - LBA48 Support
913 CONFIG_LBA48 913 CONFIG_LBA48
914 914
915 Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB 915 Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB
916 Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA. 916 Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA.
917 Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only' 917 Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only'
918 support disks up to 2.1TB. 918 support disks up to 2.1TB.
919 919
920 CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA: 920 CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA:
921 When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses. 921 When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses.
922 Default is 32bit. 922 Default is 32bit.
923 923
924 - SCSI Support: 924 - SCSI Support:
925 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and 925 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and
926 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID * 926 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID *
927 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the 927 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the
928 maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target 928 maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target
929 devices. 929 devices.
930 930
931 The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of 931 The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of
932 SCSI devices found during the last scan. 932 SCSI devices found during the last scan.
933 933
934 - NETWORK Support (PCI): 934 - NETWORK Support (PCI):
935 CONFIG_E1000 935 CONFIG_E1000
936 Support for Intel 8254x/8257x gigabit chips. 936 Support for Intel 8254x/8257x gigabit chips.
937 937
938 CONFIG_E1000_SPI 938 CONFIG_E1000_SPI
939 Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x. 939 Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x.
940 This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one 940 This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one
941 of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC. 941 of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC.
942 942
943 CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC 943 CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC
944 Allow generic access to the SPI bus on the Intel 8257x, for 944 Allow generic access to the SPI bus on the Intel 8257x, for
945 example with the "sspi" command. 945 example with the "sspi" command.
946 946
947 CONFIG_EEPRO100 947 CONFIG_EEPRO100
948 Support for Intel 82557/82559/82559ER chips. 948 Support for Intel 82557/82559/82559ER chips.
949 Optional CONFIG_EEPRO100_SROM_WRITE enables EEPROM 949 Optional CONFIG_EEPRO100_SROM_WRITE enables EEPROM
950 write routine for first time initialisation. 950 write routine for first time initialisation.
951 951
952 CONFIG_TULIP 952 CONFIG_TULIP
953 Support for Digital 2114x chips. 953 Support for Digital 2114x chips.
954 Optional CONFIG_TULIP_SELECT_MEDIA for board specific 954 Optional CONFIG_TULIP_SELECT_MEDIA for board specific
955 modem chip initialisation (KS8761/QS6611). 955 modem chip initialisation (KS8761/QS6611).
956 956
957 CONFIG_NATSEMI 957 CONFIG_NATSEMI
958 Support for National dp83815 chips. 958 Support for National dp83815 chips.
959 959
960 CONFIG_NS8382X 960 CONFIG_NS8382X
961 Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips. 961 Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips.
962 962
963 - NETWORK Support (other): 963 - NETWORK Support (other):
964 964
965 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC 965 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC
966 Support for AT91RM9200 EMAC. 966 Support for AT91RM9200 EMAC.
967 967
968 CONFIG_RMII 968 CONFIG_RMII
969 Define this to use reduced MII inteface 969 Define this to use reduced MII inteface
970 970
971 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC_QUIET 971 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC_QUIET
972 If this defined, the driver is quiet. 972 If this defined, the driver is quiet.
973 The driver doen't show link status messages. 973 The driver doen't show link status messages.
974 974
975 CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC 975 CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC
976 Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device 976 Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device
977 977
978 CONFIG_LAN91C96 978 CONFIG_LAN91C96
979 Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips. 979 Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips.
980 980
981 CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT 981 CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT
982 Define this to enable 32 bit addressing 982 Define this to enable 32 bit addressing
983 983
984 CONFIG_SMC91111 984 CONFIG_SMC91111
985 Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip 985 Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip
986 986
987 CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE 987 CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE
988 Define this to hold the physical address 988 Define this to hold the physical address
989 of the device (I/O space) 989 of the device (I/O space)
990 990
991 CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT 991 CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT
992 Define this if data bus is 32 bits 992 Define this if data bus is 32 bits
993 993
994 CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS 994 CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS
995 Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros 995 Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros
996 (some hardware wont work with macros) 996 (some hardware wont work with macros)
997 997
998 CONFIG_DRIVER_TI_EMAC 998 CONFIG_DRIVER_TI_EMAC
999 Support for davinci emac 999 Support for davinci emac
1000 1000
1001 CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT 1001 CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT
1002 Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs. 1002 Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs.
1003 1003
1004 CONFIG_FTGMAC100 1004 CONFIG_FTGMAC100
1005 Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet 1005 Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet
1006 1006
1007 CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA 1007 CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA
1008 Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY. 1008 Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY.
1009 Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY. 1009 Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY.
1010 If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur 1010 If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur
1011 wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or 1011 wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or
1012 useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit 1012 useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit
1013 control registers. This behavior won't affect the 1013 control registers. This behavior won't affect the
1014 correctnessof 10/100 link speed update. 1014 correctnessof 10/100 link speed update.
1015 1015
1016 CONFIG_SH_ETHER 1016 CONFIG_SH_ETHER
1017 Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller 1017 Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller
1018 1018
1019 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT 1019 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT
1020 Define the number of ports to be used 1020 Define the number of ports to be used
1021 1021
1022 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR 1022 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR
1023 Define the ETH PHY's address 1023 Define the ETH PHY's address
1024 1024
1025 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK 1025 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK
1026 If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush. 1026 If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush.
1027 1027
1028 - PWM Support: 1028 - PWM Support:
1029 CONFIG_PWM_IMX 1029 CONFIG_PWM_IMX
1030 Support for PWM module on the imx6. 1030 Support for PWM module on the imx6.
1031 1031
1032 - TPM Support: 1032 - TPM Support:
1033 CONFIG_TPM 1033 CONFIG_TPM
1034 Support TPM devices. 1034 Support TPM devices.
1035 1035
1036 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_INFINEON 1036 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_INFINEON
1037 Support for Infineon i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device 1037 Support for Infineon i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device
1038 per system is supported at this time. 1038 per system is supported at this time.
1039 1039
1040 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION 1040 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION
1041 Define the burst count bytes upper limit 1041 Define the burst count bytes upper limit
1042 1042
1043 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24 1043 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24
1044 Support for STMicroelectronics TPM devices. Requires DM_TPM support. 1044 Support for STMicroelectronics TPM devices. Requires DM_TPM support.
1045 1045
1046 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_I2C 1046 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_I2C
1047 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 I2C devices. 1047 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 I2C devices.
1048 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and I2C. 1048 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and I2C.
1049 1049
1050 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_SPI 1050 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_SPI
1051 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 SPI devices. 1051 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 SPI devices.
1052 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and SPI. 1052 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and SPI.
1053 1053
1054 CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI 1054 CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI
1055 Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support. 1055 Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support.
1056 1056
1057 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC 1057 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC
1058 Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device 1058 Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device
1059 per system is supported at this time. 1059 per system is supported at this time.
1060 1060
1061 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS 1061 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS
1062 Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped 1062 Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped
1063 to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at 1063 to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at
1064 0xfed40000. 1064 0xfed40000.
1065 1065
1066 CONFIG_TPM 1066 CONFIG_TPM
1067 Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides 1067 Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides
1068 functional interfaces to some TPM commands. 1068 functional interfaces to some TPM commands.
1069 Requires support for a TPM device. 1069 Requires support for a TPM device.
1070 1070
1071 CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS 1071 CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS
1072 Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library. 1072 Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library.
1073 Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1. 1073 Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1.
1074 1074
1075 - USB Support: 1075 - USB Support:
1076 At the moment only the UHCI host controller is 1076 At the moment only the UHCI host controller is
1077 supported (PIP405, MIP405); define 1077 supported (PIP405, MIP405); define
1078 CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it. 1078 CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it.
1079 define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard 1079 define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard
1080 and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB 1080 and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB
1081 storage devices. 1081 storage devices.
1082 Note: 1082 Note:
1083 Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives 1083 Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives
1084 (TEAC FD-05PUB). 1084 (TEAC FD-05PUB).
1085 1085
1086 CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the 1086 CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the
1087 txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset. 1087 txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset.
1088 1088
1089 CONFIG_USB_DWC2_REG_ADDR the physical CPU address of the DWC2 1089 CONFIG_USB_DWC2_REG_ADDR the physical CPU address of the DWC2
1090 HW module registers. 1090 HW module registers.
1091 1091
1092 - USB Device: 1092 - USB Device:
1093 Define the below if you wish to use the USB console. 1093 Define the below if you wish to use the USB console.
1094 Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the 1094 Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the
1095 command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and 1095 command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and
1096 attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print 1096 attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print
1097 it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty 1097 it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty
1098 can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to 1098 can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to
1099 appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a 1099 appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a
1100 Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device. 1100 Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device.
1101 If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate 1101 If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate
1102 a Linux host by 1102 a Linux host by
1103 # modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID 1103 # modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID
1104 else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment 1104 else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment
1105 variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following 1105 variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following
1106 might be defined in YourBoardName.h 1106 might be defined in YourBoardName.h
1107 1107
1108 CONFIG_USB_DEVICE 1108 CONFIG_USB_DEVICE
1109 Define this to build a UDC device 1109 Define this to build a UDC device
1110 1110
1111 CONFIG_USB_TTY 1111 CONFIG_USB_TTY
1112 Define this to have a tty type of device available to 1112 Define this to have a tty type of device available to
1113 talk to the UDC device 1113 talk to the UDC device
1114 1114
1115 CONFIG_USBD_HS 1115 CONFIG_USBD_HS
1116 Define this to enable the high speed support for usb 1116 Define this to enable the high speed support for usb
1117 device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine 1117 device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine
1118 int is_usbd_high_speed(void) 1118 int is_usbd_high_speed(void)
1119 also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll 1119 also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll
1120 whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full 1120 whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full
1121 speed. 1121 speed.
1122 1122
1123 CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV 1123 CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV
1124 Define this if you want stdin, stdout &/or stderr to 1124 Define this if you want stdin, stdout &/or stderr to
1125 be set to usbtty. 1125 be set to usbtty.
1126 1126
1127 If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to 1127 If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to
1128 define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h 1128 define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h
1129 or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define 1129 or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define
1130 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME, 1130 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME,
1131 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot 1131 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot
1132 should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host. 1132 should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host.
1133 1133
1134 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER 1134 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER
1135 Define this string as the name of your company for 1135 Define this string as the name of your company for
1136 - CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company" 1136 - CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company"
1137 1137
1138 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME 1138 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME
1139 Define this string as the name of your product 1139 Define this string as the name of your product
1140 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device" 1140 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device"
1141 1141
1142 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 1142 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID
1143 Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB 1143 Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB
1144 Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID 1144 Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID
1145 to avoid polluting the USB namespace. 1145 to avoid polluting the USB namespace.
1146 - CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF 1146 - CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF
1147 1147
1148 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 1148 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID
1149 Define this as the unique Product ID 1149 Define this as the unique Product ID
1150 for your device 1150 for your device
1151 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF 1151 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF
1152 1152
1153 - ULPI Layer Support: 1153 - ULPI Layer Support:
1154 The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via 1154 The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via
1155 the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY 1155 the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY
1156 via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and 1156 via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and
1157 the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based 1157 the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based
1158 viewport is supported. 1158 viewport is supported.
1159 To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and 1159 To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and
1160 CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file. 1160 CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file.
1161 If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the 1161 If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the
1162 standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to 1162 standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to
1163 the appropriate value in Hz. 1163 the appropriate value in Hz.
1164 1164
1165 - MMC Support: 1165 - MMC Support:
1166 The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To 1166 The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To
1167 enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be 1167 enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be
1168 accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device 1168 accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device
1169 to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is 1169 to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is
1170 enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with 1170 enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with
1171 the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT. 1171 the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT.
1172 1172
1173 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF 1173 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF
1174 Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller 1174 Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller
1175 1175
1176 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR 1176 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR
1177 Define the base address of MMCIF registers 1177 Define the base address of MMCIF registers
1178 1178
1179 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK 1179 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK
1180 Define the clock frequency for MMCIF 1180 Define the clock frequency for MMCIF
1181 1181
1182 CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_BOOT 1182 CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_BOOT
1183 Enable some additional features of the eMMC boot partitions. 1183 Enable some additional features of the eMMC boot partitions.
1184 1184
1185 CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_RPMB 1185 CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_RPMB
1186 Enable the commands for reading, writing and programming the 1186 Enable the commands for reading, writing and programming the
1187 key for the Replay Protection Memory Block partition in eMMC. 1187 key for the Replay Protection Memory Block partition in eMMC.
1188 1188
1189 - USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support: 1189 - USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support:
1190 CONFIG_DFU_OVER_USB 1190 CONFIG_DFU_OVER_USB
1191 This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class 1191 This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class
1192 1192
1193 CONFIG_DFU_MMC 1193 CONFIG_DFU_MMC
1194 This enables support for exposing (e)MMC devices via DFU. 1194 This enables support for exposing (e)MMC devices via DFU.
1195 1195
1196 CONFIG_DFU_NAND 1196 CONFIG_DFU_NAND
1197 This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU. 1197 This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU.
1198 1198
1199 CONFIG_DFU_RAM 1199 CONFIG_DFU_RAM
1200 This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU. 1200 This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU.
1201 Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but 1201 Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but
1202 allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage, 1202 allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage,
1203 one that would help mostly the developer. 1203 one that would help mostly the developer.
1204 1204
1205 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE 1205 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE
1206 Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the 1206 Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the
1207 raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer 1207 raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer
1208 configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable 1208 configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable
1209 through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable. 1209 through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable.
1210 1210
1211 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE 1211 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE
1212 When updating files rather than the raw storage device, 1212 When updating files rather than the raw storage device,
1213 we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write 1213 we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write
1214 the buffer once we've been given the whole file. Define 1214 the buffer once we've been given the whole file. Define
1215 this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer. 1215 this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer.
1216 Default is 4 MiB if undefined. 1216 Default is 4 MiB if undefined.
1217 1217
1218 DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT 1218 DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT
1219 Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the 1219 Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the
1220 host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending 1220 host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending
1221 a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device. 1221 a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device.
1222 1222
1223 DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT 1223 DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT
1224 Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when 1224 Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when
1225 entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before 1225 entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before
1226 sending again an USB request to the device. 1226 sending again an USB request to the device.
1227 1227
1228 - Journaling Flash filesystem support: 1228 - Journaling Flash filesystem support:
1229 CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND 1229 CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND
1230 Define these for a default partition on a NAND device 1230 Define these for a default partition on a NAND device
1231 1231
1232 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR, 1232 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR,
1233 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS 1233 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS
1234 Define these for a default partition on a NOR device 1234 Define these for a default partition on a NOR device
1235 1235
1236 - Keyboard Support: 1236 - Keyboard Support:
1237 See Kconfig help for available keyboard drivers. 1237 See Kconfig help for available keyboard drivers.
1238 1238
1239 CONFIG_KEYBOARD 1239 CONFIG_KEYBOARD
1240 1240
1241 Define this to enable a custom keyboard support. 1241 Define this to enable a custom keyboard support.
1242 This simply calls drv_keyboard_init() which must be 1242 This simply calls drv_keyboard_init() which must be
1243 defined in your board-specific files. This option is deprecated 1243 defined in your board-specific files. This option is deprecated
1244 and is only used by novena. For new boards, use driver model 1244 and is only used by novena. For new boards, use driver model
1245 instead. 1245 instead.
1246 1246
1247 - Video support: 1247 - Video support:
1248 CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB 1248 CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB
1249 Enable the Freescale DIU video driver. Reference boards for 1249 Enable the Freescale DIU video driver. Reference boards for
1250 SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU 1250 SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU
1251 support, and should also define these other macros: 1251 support, and should also define these other macros:
1252 1252
1253 CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR 1253 CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR
1254 CONFIG_VIDEO 1254 CONFIG_VIDEO
1255 CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE 1255 CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE
1256 CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR 1256 CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR
1257 CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE 1257 CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE
1258 CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO 1258 CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO
1259 CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO 1259 CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO
1260 1260
1261 The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment 1261 The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment
1262 variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during 1262 variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during
1263 boot. See the documentation file doc/README.video for a 1263 boot. See the documentation file doc/README.video for a
1264 description of this variable. 1264 description of this variable.
1265 1265
1266 - LCD Support: CONFIG_LCD 1266 - LCD Support: CONFIG_LCD
1267 1267
1268 Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD 1268 Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD
1269 display); also select one of the supported displays 1269 display); also select one of the supported displays
1270 by defining one of these: 1270 by defining one of these:
1271 1271
1272 CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD: 1272 CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD:
1273 1273
1274 HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320. 1274 HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320.
1275 1275
1276 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33: 1276 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33:
1277 1277
1278 NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan. 1278 NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan.
1279 1279
1280 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20 1280 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20
1281 1281
1282 NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480. 1282 NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480.
1283 Active, color, single scan. 1283 Active, color, single scan.
1284 1284
1285 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54 1285 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54
1286 1286
1287 NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480. 1287 NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480.
1288 Active, color, single scan. 1288 Active, color, single scan.
1289 1289
1290 CONFIG_SHARP_16x9 1290 CONFIG_SHARP_16x9
1291 1291
1292 Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan. 1292 Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan.
1293 It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is. 1293 It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is.
1294 1294
1295 CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341 1295 CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341
1296 1296
1297 Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480. 1297 Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480.
1298 Active, color, single scan. 1298 Active, color, single scan.
1299 1299
1300 CONFIG_HLD1045 1300 CONFIG_HLD1045
1301 1301
1302 HLD1045 display, 640x480. 1302 HLD1045 display, 640x480.
1303 Active, color, single scan. 1303 Active, color, single scan.
1304 1304
1305 CONFIG_OPTREX_BW 1305 CONFIG_OPTREX_BW
1306 1306
1307 Optrex CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5 1307 Optrex CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5
1308 or 1308 or
1309 Hitachi LMG6912RPFC-00T 1309 Hitachi LMG6912RPFC-00T
1310 or 1310 or
1311 Hitachi SP14Q002 1311 Hitachi SP14Q002
1312 1312
1313 320x240. Black & white. 1313 320x240. Black & white.
1314 1314
1315 CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT 1315 CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT
1316 1316
1317 Normally the LCD is page-aligned (typically 4KB). If this is 1317 Normally the LCD is page-aligned (typically 4KB). If this is
1318 defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead. 1318 defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead.
1319 For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE 1319 For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE
1320 here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on 1320 here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on
1321 a per-section basis. 1321 a per-section basis.
1322 1322
1323 1323
1324 CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION 1324 CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION
1325 1325
1326 Sometimes, for example if the display is mounted in portrait 1326 Sometimes, for example if the display is mounted in portrait
1327 mode or even if it's mounted landscape but rotated by 180degree, 1327 mode or even if it's mounted landscape but rotated by 180degree,
1328 we need to rotate our content of the display relative to the 1328 we need to rotate our content of the display relative to the
1329 framebuffer, so that user can read the messages which are 1329 framebuffer, so that user can read the messages which are
1330 printed out. 1330 printed out.
1331 Once CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is defined, the lcd_console will be 1331 Once CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is defined, the lcd_console will be
1332 initialized with a given rotation from "vl_rot" out of 1332 initialized with a given rotation from "vl_rot" out of
1333 "vidinfo_t" which is provided by the board specific code. 1333 "vidinfo_t" which is provided by the board specific code.
1334 The value for vl_rot is coded as following (matching to 1334 The value for vl_rot is coded as following (matching to
1335 fbcon=rotate:<n> linux-kernel commandline): 1335 fbcon=rotate:<n> linux-kernel commandline):
1336 0 = no rotation respectively 0 degree 1336 0 = no rotation respectively 0 degree
1337 1 = 90 degree rotation 1337 1 = 90 degree rotation
1338 2 = 180 degree rotation 1338 2 = 180 degree rotation
1339 3 = 270 degree rotation 1339 3 = 270 degree rotation
1340 1340
1341 If CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is not defined, the console will be 1341 If CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is not defined, the console will be
1342 initialized with 0degree rotation. 1342 initialized with 0degree rotation.
1343 1343
1344 CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8 1344 CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8
1345 1345
1346 Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD. 1346 Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD.
1347 1347
1348 CONFIG_I2C_EDID 1348 CONFIG_I2C_EDID
1349 1349
1350 Enables an 'i2c edid' command which can read EDID 1350 Enables an 'i2c edid' command which can read EDID
1351 information over I2C from an attached LCD display. 1351 information over I2C from an attached LCD display.
1352 1352
1353 - Splash Screen Support: CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN 1353 - Splash Screen Support: CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN
1354 1354
1355 If this option is set, the environment is checked for 1355 If this option is set, the environment is checked for
1356 a variable "splashimage". If found, the usual display 1356 a variable "splashimage". If found, the usual display
1357 of logo, copyright and system information on the LCD 1357 of logo, copyright and system information on the LCD
1358 is suppressed and the BMP image at the address 1358 is suppressed and the BMP image at the address
1359 specified in "splashimage" is loaded instead. The 1359 specified in "splashimage" is loaded instead. The
1360 console is redirected to the "nulldev", too. This 1360 console is redirected to the "nulldev", too. This
1361 allows for a "silent" boot where a splash screen is 1361 allows for a "silent" boot where a splash screen is
1362 loaded very quickly after power-on. 1362 loaded very quickly after power-on.
1363 1363
1364 CONFIG_SPLASHIMAGE_GUARD 1364 CONFIG_SPLASHIMAGE_GUARD
1365 1365
1366 If this option is set, then U-Boot will prevent the environment 1366 If this option is set, then U-Boot will prevent the environment
1367 variable "splashimage" from being set to a problematic address 1367 variable "splashimage" from being set to a problematic address
1368 (see doc/README.displaying-bmps). 1368 (see doc/README.displaying-bmps).
1369 This option is useful for targets where, due to alignment 1369 This option is useful for targets where, due to alignment
1370 restrictions, an improperly aligned BMP image will cause a data 1370 restrictions, an improperly aligned BMP image will cause a data
1371 abort. If you think you will not have problems with unaligned 1371 abort. If you think you will not have problems with unaligned
1372 accesses (for example because your toolchain prevents them) 1372 accesses (for example because your toolchain prevents them)
1373 there is no need to set this option. 1373 there is no need to set this option.
1374 1374
1375 CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN_ALIGN 1375 CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN_ALIGN
1376 1376
1377 If this option is set the splash image can be freely positioned 1377 If this option is set the splash image can be freely positioned
1378 on the screen. Environment variable "splashpos" specifies the 1378 on the screen. Environment variable "splashpos" specifies the
1379 position as "x,y". If a positive number is given it is used as 1379 position as "x,y". If a positive number is given it is used as
1380 number of pixel from left/top. If a negative number is given it 1380 number of pixel from left/top. If a negative number is given it
1381 is used as number of pixel from right/bottom. You can also 1381 is used as number of pixel from right/bottom. You can also
1382 specify 'm' for centering the image. 1382 specify 'm' for centering the image.
1383 1383
1384 Example: 1384 Example:
1385 setenv splashpos m,m 1385 setenv splashpos m,m
1386 => image at center of screen 1386 => image at center of screen
1387 1387
1388 setenv splashpos 30,20 1388 setenv splashpos 30,20
1389 => image at x = 30 and y = 20 1389 => image at x = 30 and y = 20
1390 1390
1391 setenv splashpos -10,m 1391 setenv splashpos -10,m
1392 => vertically centered image 1392 => vertically centered image
1393 at x = dspWidth - bmpWidth - 9 1393 at x = dspWidth - bmpWidth - 9
1394 1394
1395 - Gzip compressed BMP image support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_GZIP 1395 - Gzip compressed BMP image support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_GZIP
1396 1396
1397 If this option is set, additionally to standard BMP 1397 If this option is set, additionally to standard BMP
1398 images, gzipped BMP images can be displayed via the 1398 images, gzipped BMP images can be displayed via the
1399 splashscreen support or the bmp command. 1399 splashscreen support or the bmp command.
1400 1400
1401 - Run length encoded BMP image (RLE8) support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_RLE8 1401 - Run length encoded BMP image (RLE8) support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_RLE8
1402 1402
1403 If this option is set, 8-bit RLE compressed BMP images 1403 If this option is set, 8-bit RLE compressed BMP images
1404 can be displayed via the splashscreen support or the 1404 can be displayed via the splashscreen support or the
1405 bmp command. 1405 bmp command.
1406 1406
1407 - Compression support: 1407 - Compression support:
1408 CONFIG_GZIP 1408 CONFIG_GZIP
1409 1409
1410 Enabled by default to support gzip compressed images. 1410 Enabled by default to support gzip compressed images.
1411 1411
1412 CONFIG_BZIP2 1412 CONFIG_BZIP2
1413 1413
1414 If this option is set, support for bzip2 compressed 1414 If this option is set, support for bzip2 compressed
1415 images is included. If not, only uncompressed and gzip 1415 images is included. If not, only uncompressed and gzip
1416 compressed images are supported. 1416 compressed images are supported.
1417 1417
1418 NOTE: the bzip2 algorithm requires a lot of RAM, so 1418 NOTE: the bzip2 algorithm requires a lot of RAM, so
1419 the malloc area (as defined by CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN) should 1419 the malloc area (as defined by CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN) should
1420 be at least 4MB. 1420 be at least 4MB.
1421 1421
1422 - MII/PHY support: 1422 - MII/PHY support:
1423 CONFIG_PHY_ADDR 1423 CONFIG_PHY_ADDR
1424 1424
1425 The address of PHY on MII bus. 1425 The address of PHY on MII bus.
1426 1426
1427 CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx) 1427 CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx)
1428 1428
1429 The clock frequency of the MII bus 1429 The clock frequency of the MII bus
1430 1430
1431 CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY 1431 CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY
1432 1432
1433 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after 1433 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
1434 reset before any MII register access is possible. 1434 reset before any MII register access is possible.
1435 For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay 1435 For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay
1436 required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A) 1436 required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A)
1437 1437
1438 CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx) 1438 CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx)
1439 1439
1440 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after 1440 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
1441 command issued before MII status register can be read 1441 command issued before MII status register can be read
1442 1442
1443 - IP address: 1443 - IP address:
1444 CONFIG_IPADDR 1444 CONFIG_IPADDR
1445 1445
1446 Define a default value for the IP address to use for 1446 Define a default value for the IP address to use for
1447 the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not 1447 the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not
1448 determined through e.g. bootp. 1448 determined through e.g. bootp.
1449 (Environment variable "ipaddr") 1449 (Environment variable "ipaddr")
1450 1450
1451 - Server IP address: 1451 - Server IP address:
1452 CONFIG_SERVERIP 1452 CONFIG_SERVERIP
1453 1453
1454 Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP 1454 Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP
1455 server to contact when using the "tftboot" command. 1455 server to contact when using the "tftboot" command.
1456 (Environment variable "serverip") 1456 (Environment variable "serverip")
1457 1457
1458 CONFIG_KEEP_SERVERADDR 1458 CONFIG_KEEP_SERVERADDR
1459 1459
1460 Keeps the server's MAC address, in the env 'serveraddr' 1460 Keeps the server's MAC address, in the env 'serveraddr'
1461 for passing to bootargs (like Linux's netconsole option) 1461 for passing to bootargs (like Linux's netconsole option)
1462 1462
1463 - Gateway IP address: 1463 - Gateway IP address:
1464 CONFIG_GATEWAYIP 1464 CONFIG_GATEWAYIP
1465 1465
1466 Defines a default value for the IP address of the 1466 Defines a default value for the IP address of the
1467 default router where packets to other networks are 1467 default router where packets to other networks are
1468 sent to. 1468 sent to.
1469 (Environment variable "gatewayip") 1469 (Environment variable "gatewayip")
1470 1470
1471 - Subnet mask: 1471 - Subnet mask:
1472 CONFIG_NETMASK 1472 CONFIG_NETMASK
1473 1473
1474 Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or 1474 Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or
1475 routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP 1475 routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP
1476 address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be 1476 address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be
1477 forwarded through a router. 1477 forwarded through a router.
1478 (Environment variable "netmask") 1478 (Environment variable "netmask")
1479 1479
1480 - Multicast TFTP Mode: 1480 - Multicast TFTP Mode:
1481 CONFIG_MCAST_TFTP 1481 CONFIG_MCAST_TFTP
1482 1482
1483 Defines whether you want to support multicast TFTP as per 1483 Defines whether you want to support multicast TFTP as per
1484 rfc-2090; for example to work with atftp. Lets lots of targets 1484 rfc-2090; for example to work with atftp. Lets lots of targets
1485 tftp down the same boot image concurrently. Note: the Ethernet 1485 tftp down the same boot image concurrently. Note: the Ethernet
1486 driver in use must provide a function: mcast() to join/leave a 1486 driver in use must provide a function: mcast() to join/leave a
1487 multicast group. 1487 multicast group.
1488 1488
1489 - BOOTP Recovery Mode: 1489 - BOOTP Recovery Mode:
1490 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY 1490 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY
1491 1491
1492 If you have many targets in a network that try to 1492 If you have many targets in a network that try to
1493 boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all 1493 boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all
1494 systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same 1494 systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same
1495 moment (which would happen for instance at recovery 1495 moment (which would happen for instance at recovery
1496 from a power failure, when all systems will try to 1496 from a power failure, when all systems will try to
1497 boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining 1497 boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining
1498 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be 1498 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be
1499 inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The 1499 inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The
1500 following delays are inserted then: 1500 following delays are inserted then:
1501 1501
1502 1st BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 1 sec 1502 1st BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 1 sec
1503 2nd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 2 sec 1503 2nd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 2 sec
1504 3rd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 4 sec 1504 3rd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 4 sec
1505 4th and following 1505 4th and following
1506 BOOTP requests: delay 0 ... 8 sec 1506 BOOTP requests: delay 0 ... 8 sec
1507 1507
1508 CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE 1508 CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE
1509 1509
1510 BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The 1510 BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The
1511 server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and 1511 server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and
1512 U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of 1512 U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of
1513 an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses 1513 an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses
1514 aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP 1514 aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP
1515 ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to 1515 ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to
1516 respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it 1516 respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it
1517 takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that 1517 takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that
1518 time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order 1518 time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order
1519 to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these 1519 to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these
1520 retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of 1520 retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of
1521 IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this 1521 IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this
1522 cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding 1522 cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding
1523 requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers 1523 requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers
1524 from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency. 1524 from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency.
1525 1525
1526 - DHCP Advanced Options: 1526 - DHCP Advanced Options:
1527 You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining 1527 You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining
1528 CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols: 1528 CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols:
1529 1529
1530 CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN 1530 CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN
1531 CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE 1531 CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE
1532 CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME 1532 CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME
1533 CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER 1533 CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER
1534 CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET 1534 CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET
1535 CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX 1535 CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX
1536 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL 1536 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL
1537 1537
1538 CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip 1538 CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip
1539 environment variable, not the BOOTP server. 1539 environment variable, not the BOOTP server.
1540 1540
1541 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found 1541 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found
1542 after the configured retry count, the call will fail 1542 after the configured retry count, the call will fail
1543 instead of starting over. This can be used to fail over 1543 instead of starting over. This can be used to fail over
1544 to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server 1544 to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server
1545 is not available. 1545 is not available.
1546 1546
1547 CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME - Some DHCP servers are capable 1547 CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME - Some DHCP servers are capable
1548 to do a dynamic update of a DNS server. To do this, they 1548 to do a dynamic update of a DNS server. To do this, they
1549 need the hostname of the DHCP requester. 1549 need the hostname of the DHCP requester.
1550 If CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME is defined, the content 1550 If CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME is defined, the content
1551 of the "hostname" environment variable is passed as 1551 of the "hostname" environment variable is passed as
1552 option 12 to the DHCP server. 1552 option 12 to the DHCP server.
1553 1553
1554 CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY 1554 CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY
1555 1555
1556 A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between 1556 A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between
1557 receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request". 1557 receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request".
1558 This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't 1558 This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't
1559 respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an 1559 respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an
1560 AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed 1560 AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed
1561 to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003 1561 to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003
1562 DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at 1562 DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at
1563 least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope 1563 least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope
1564 that one of the retries will be successful but note that 1564 that one of the retries will be successful but note that
1565 the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than 1565 the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than
1566 this delay. 1566 this delay.
1567 1567
1568 - Link-local IP address negotiation: 1568 - Link-local IP address negotiation:
1569 Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network 1569 Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network
1570 for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration. 1570 for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration.
1571 This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed 1571 This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed
1572 to exist in all environments that the device must operate. 1572 to exist in all environments that the device must operate.
1573 1573
1574 See doc/README.link-local for more information. 1574 See doc/README.link-local for more information.
1575 1575
1576 - MAC address from environment variables 1576 - MAC address from environment variables
1577 1577
1578 FDT_SEQ_MACADDR_FROM_ENV 1578 FDT_SEQ_MACADDR_FROM_ENV
1579 1579
1580 Fix-up device tree with MAC addresses fetched sequentially from 1580 Fix-up device tree with MAC addresses fetched sequentially from
1581 environment variables. This config work on assumption that 1581 environment variables. This config work on assumption that
1582 non-usable ethernet node of device-tree are either not present 1582 non-usable ethernet node of device-tree are either not present
1583 or their status has been marked as "disabled". 1583 or their status has been marked as "disabled".
1584 1584
1585 - CDP Options: 1585 - CDP Options:
1586 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID 1586 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID
1587 1587
1588 The device id used in CDP trigger frames. 1588 The device id used in CDP trigger frames.
1589 1589
1590 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX 1590 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX
1591 1591
1592 A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address 1592 A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address
1593 of the device. 1593 of the device.
1594 1594
1595 CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID 1595 CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID
1596 1596
1597 A printf format string which contains the ascii name of 1597 A printf format string which contains the ascii name of
1598 the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets 1598 the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets
1599 eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc. 1599 eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc.
1600 1600
1601 CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES 1601 CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES
1602 1602
1603 A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities; 1603 A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities;
1604 0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards. 1604 0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards.
1605 1605
1606 CONFIG_CDP_VERSION 1606 CONFIG_CDP_VERSION
1607 1607
1608 An ascii string containing the version of the software. 1608 An ascii string containing the version of the software.
1609 1609
1610 CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM 1610 CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM
1611 1611
1612 An ascii string containing the name of the platform. 1612 An ascii string containing the name of the platform.
1613 1613
1614 CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER 1614 CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER
1615 1615
1616 A 32bit integer sent on the trigger. 1616 A 32bit integer sent on the trigger.
1617 1617
1618 CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION 1618 CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION
1619 1619
1620 A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the 1620 A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the
1621 device in .1 of milliwatts. 1621 device in .1 of milliwatts.
1622 1622
1623 CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE 1623 CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE
1624 1624
1625 A byte containing the id of the VLAN. 1625 A byte containing the id of the VLAN.
1626 1626
1627 - Status LED: CONFIG_LED_STATUS 1627 - Status LED: CONFIG_LED_STATUS
1628 1628
1629 Several configurations allow to display the current 1629 Several configurations allow to display the current
1630 status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink 1630 status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink
1631 fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as 1631 fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as
1632 soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and 1632 soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and
1633 start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running 1633 start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running
1634 (supported by a status LED driver in the Linux 1634 (supported by a status LED driver in the Linux
1635 kernel). Defining CONFIG_LED_STATUS enables this 1635 kernel). Defining CONFIG_LED_STATUS enables this
1636 feature in U-Boot. 1636 feature in U-Boot.
1637 1637
1638 Additional options: 1638 Additional options:
1639 1639
1640 CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO 1640 CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO
1641 The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin. 1641 The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin.
1642 In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a 1642 In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a
1643 status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO 1643 status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO
1644 to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary. 1644 to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary.
1645 1645
1646 CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE 1646 CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE
1647 Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which 1647 Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which
1648 case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and 1648 case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and
1649 GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state. 1649 GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state.
1650 In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined 1650 In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined
1651 with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity. 1651 with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity.
1652 1652
1653 - I2C Support: CONFIG_SYS_I2C 1653 - I2C Support: CONFIG_SYS_I2C
1654 1654
1655 This enable the NEW i2c subsystem, and will allow you to use 1655 This enable the NEW i2c subsystem, and will allow you to use
1656 i2c commands at the u-boot command line (as long as you set 1656 i2c commands at the u-boot command line (as long as you set
1657 CONFIG_CMD_I2C in CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c 1657 CONFIG_CMD_I2C in CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c
1658 based realtime clock chips or other i2c devices. See 1658 based realtime clock chips or other i2c devices. See
1659 common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the command line 1659 common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the command line
1660 interface. 1660 interface.
1661 1661
1662 ported i2c driver to the new framework: 1662 ported i2c driver to the new framework:
1663 - drivers/i2c/soft_i2c.c: 1663 - drivers/i2c/soft_i2c.c:
1664 - activate first bus with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT define 1664 - activate first bus with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT define
1665 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE 1665 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE
1666 for defining speed and slave address 1666 for defining speed and slave address
1667 - activate second bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS2 define 1667 - activate second bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS2 define
1668 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_2 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_2 1668 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_2 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_2
1669 for defining speed and slave address 1669 for defining speed and slave address
1670 - activate third bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS3 define 1670 - activate third bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS3 define
1671 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_3 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_3 1671 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_3 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_3
1672 for defining speed and slave address 1672 for defining speed and slave address
1673 - activate fourth bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS4 define 1673 - activate fourth bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS4 define
1674 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_4 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_4 1674 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_4 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_4
1675 for defining speed and slave address 1675 for defining speed and slave address
1676 1676
1677 - drivers/i2c/fsl_i2c.c: 1677 - drivers/i2c/fsl_i2c.c:
1678 - activate i2c driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_FSL 1678 - activate i2c driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_FSL
1679 define CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_OFFSET for setting the register 1679 define CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_OFFSET for setting the register
1680 offset CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SPEED for the i2c speed and 1680 offset CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SPEED for the i2c speed and
1681 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SLAVE for the slave addr of the first 1681 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SLAVE for the slave addr of the first
1682 bus. 1682 bus.
1683 - If your board supports a second fsl i2c bus, define 1683 - If your board supports a second fsl i2c bus, define
1684 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_OFFSET for the register offset 1684 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_OFFSET for the register offset
1685 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SPEED for the speed and 1685 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SPEED for the speed and
1686 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SLAVE for the slave address of the 1686 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SLAVE for the slave address of the
1687 second bus. 1687 second bus.
1688 1688
1689 - drivers/i2c/tegra_i2c.c: 1689 - drivers/i2c/tegra_i2c.c:
1690 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_TEGRA 1690 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_TEGRA
1691 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses with a fix speed from 1691 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses with a fix speed from
1692 100000 and the slave addr 0! 1692 100000 and the slave addr 0!
1693 1693
1694 - drivers/i2c/ppc4xx_i2c.c 1694 - drivers/i2c/ppc4xx_i2c.c
1695 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX 1695 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX
1696 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH0 activate hardware channel 0 1696 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
1697 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH1 activate hardware channel 1 1697 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH1 activate hardware channel 1
1698 1698
1699 - drivers/i2c/i2c_mxc.c 1699 - drivers/i2c/i2c_mxc.c
1700 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC 1700 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC
1701 - enable bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C1 1701 - enable bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C1
1702 - enable bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C2 1702 - enable bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C2
1703 - enable bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C3 1703 - enable bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C3
1704 - enable bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C4 1704 - enable bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C4
1705 - define speed for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SPEED 1705 - define speed for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SPEED
1706 - define slave for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SLAVE 1706 - define slave for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SLAVE
1707 - define speed for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SPEED 1707 - define speed for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SPEED
1708 - define slave for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SLAVE 1708 - define slave for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SLAVE
1709 - define speed for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SPEED 1709 - define speed for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SPEED
1710 - define slave for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SLAVE 1710 - define slave for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SLAVE
1711 - define speed for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SPEED 1711 - define speed for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SPEED
1712 - define slave for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SLAVE 1712 - define slave for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SLAVE
1713 If those defines are not set, default value is 100000 1713 If those defines are not set, default value is 100000
1714 for speed, and 0 for slave. 1714 for speed, and 0 for slave.
1715 1715
1716 - drivers/i2c/rcar_i2c.c: 1716 - drivers/i2c/rcar_i2c.c:
1717 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RCAR 1717 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RCAR
1718 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses 1718 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses
1719 1719
1720 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_BASE for setting the register channel 0 1720 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_BASE for setting the register channel 0
1721 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_SPEED for for the speed channel 0 1721 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_SPEED for for the speed channel 0
1722 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_BASE for setting the register channel 1 1722 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_BASE for setting the register channel 1
1723 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_SPEED for for the speed channel 1 1723 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_SPEED for for the speed channel 1
1724 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_BASE for setting the register channel 2 1724 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_BASE for setting the register channel 2
1725 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_SPEED for for the speed channel 2 1725 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_SPEED for for the speed channel 2
1726 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_BASE for setting the register channel 3 1726 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_BASE for setting the register channel 3
1727 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_SPEED for for the speed channel 3 1727 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_SPEED for for the speed channel 3
1728 - CONFIF_SYS_RCAR_I2C_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses 1728 - CONFIF_SYS_RCAR_I2C_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses
1729 1729
1730 - drivers/i2c/sh_i2c.c: 1730 - drivers/i2c/sh_i2c.c:
1731 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH 1731 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH
1732 - This driver adds from 2 to 5 i2c buses 1732 - This driver adds from 2 to 5 i2c buses
1733 1733
1734 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE0 for setting the register channel 0 1734 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE0 for setting the register channel 0
1735 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED0 for for the speed channel 0 1735 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED0 for for the speed channel 0
1736 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE1 for setting the register channel 1 1736 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE1 for setting the register channel 1
1737 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED1 for for the speed channel 1 1737 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED1 for for the speed channel 1
1738 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE2 for setting the register channel 2 1738 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE2 for setting the register channel 2
1739 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED2 for for the speed channel 2 1739 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED2 for for the speed channel 2
1740 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE3 for setting the register channel 3 1740 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE3 for setting the register channel 3
1741 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED3 for for the speed channel 3 1741 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED3 for for the speed channel 3
1742 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE4 for setting the register channel 4 1742 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE4 for setting the register channel 4
1743 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED4 for for the speed channel 4 1743 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED4 for for the speed channel 4
1744 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses 1744 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses
1745 1745
1746 - drivers/i2c/omap24xx_i2c.c 1746 - drivers/i2c/omap24xx_i2c.c
1747 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_OMAP24XX 1747 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_OMAP24XX
1748 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED speed channel 0 1748 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED speed channel 0
1749 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE slave addr channel 0 1749 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE slave addr channel 0
1750 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED1 speed channel 1 1750 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED1 speed channel 1
1751 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE1 slave addr channel 1 1751 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE1 slave addr channel 1
1752 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED2 speed channel 2 1752 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED2 speed channel 2
1753 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE2 slave addr channel 2 1753 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE2 slave addr channel 2
1754 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED3 speed channel 3 1754 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED3 speed channel 3
1755 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE3 slave addr channel 3 1755 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE3 slave addr channel 3
1756 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED4 speed channel 4 1756 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED4 speed channel 4
1757 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE4 slave addr channel 4 1757 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE4 slave addr channel 4
1758 1758
1759 - drivers/i2c/zynq_i2c.c 1759 - drivers/i2c/zynq_i2c.c
1760 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ 1760 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ
1761 - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SPEED for speed setting 1761 - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SPEED for speed setting
1762 - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SLAVE for slave addr 1762 - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SLAVE for slave addr
1763 1763
1764 - drivers/i2c/s3c24x0_i2c.c: 1764 - drivers/i2c/s3c24x0_i2c.c:
1765 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_S3C24X0 1765 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_S3C24X0
1766 - This driver adds i2c buses (11 for Exynos5250, Exynos5420 1766 - This driver adds i2c buses (11 for Exynos5250, Exynos5420
1767 9 i2c buses for Exynos4 and 1 for S3C24X0 SoCs from Samsung) 1767 9 i2c buses for Exynos4 and 1 for S3C24X0 SoCs from Samsung)
1768 with a fix speed from 100000 and the slave addr 0! 1768 with a fix speed from 100000 and the slave addr 0!
1769 1769
1770 - drivers/i2c/ihs_i2c.c 1770 - drivers/i2c/ihs_i2c.c
1771 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS 1771 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS
1772 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH0 activate hardware channel 0 1772 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
1773 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0 speed channel 0 1773 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0 speed channel 0
1774 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0 slave addr channel 0 1774 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0 slave addr channel 0
1775 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH1 activate hardware channel 1 1775 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH1 activate hardware channel 1
1776 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1 speed channel 1 1776 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1 speed channel 1
1777 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1 slave addr channel 1 1777 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1 slave addr channel 1
1778 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH2 activate hardware channel 2 1778 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH2 activate hardware channel 2
1779 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2 speed channel 2 1779 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2 speed channel 2
1780 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2 slave addr channel 2 1780 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2 slave addr channel 2
1781 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH3 activate hardware channel 3 1781 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH3 activate hardware channel 3
1782 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3 speed channel 3 1782 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3 speed channel 3
1783 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3 slave addr channel 3 1783 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3 slave addr channel 3
1784 - activate dual channel with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_DUAL 1784 - activate dual channel with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_DUAL
1785 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0_1 speed channel 0_1 1785 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0_1 speed channel 0_1
1786 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0_1 slave addr channel 0_1 1786 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0_1 slave addr channel 0_1
1787 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1_1 speed channel 1_1 1787 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1_1 speed channel 1_1
1788 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1_1 slave addr channel 1_1 1788 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1_1 slave addr channel 1_1
1789 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2_1 speed channel 2_1 1789 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2_1 speed channel 2_1
1790 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2_1 slave addr channel 2_1 1790 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2_1 slave addr channel 2_1
1791 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3_1 speed channel 3_1 1791 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3_1 speed channel 3_1
1792 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3_1 slave addr channel 3_1 1792 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3_1 slave addr channel 3_1
1793 1793
1794 additional defines: 1794 additional defines:
1795 1795
1796 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES 1796 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES
1797 Hold the number of i2c buses you want to use. 1797 Hold the number of i2c buses you want to use.
1798 1798
1799 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS 1799 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS
1800 define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware. 1800 define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware.
1801 if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can 1801 if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can
1802 omit this define. 1802 omit this define.
1803 1803
1804 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS 1804 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS
1805 define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected 1805 define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected
1806 on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this 1806 on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this
1807 define. 1807 define.
1808 1808
1809 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES 1809 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES
1810 hold a list of buses you want to use, only used if 1810 hold a list of buses you want to use, only used if
1811 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example 1811 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example
1812 a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and 1812 a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and
1813 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9: 1813 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9:
1814 1814
1815 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES {{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \ 1815 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES {{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
1816 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \ 1816 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \
1817 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \ 1817 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \
1818 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \ 1818 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \
1819 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \ 1819 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \
1820 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \ 1820 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \
1821 {1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \ 1821 {1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
1822 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \ 1822 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \
1823 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \ 1823 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \
1824 } 1824 }
1825 1825
1826 which defines 1826 which defines
1827 bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux 1827 bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux
1828 bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1 1828 bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1
1829 bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2 1829 bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2
1830 bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3 1830 bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3
1831 bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4 1831 bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4
1832 bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5 1832 bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5
1833 bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux 1833 bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux
1834 bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1 1834 bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1
1835 bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2 1835 bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2
1836 1836
1837 If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define. 1837 If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define.
1838 1838
1839 - Legacy I2C Support: 1839 - Legacy I2C Support:
1840 If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT) 1840 If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT)
1841 then the following macros need to be defined (examples are 1841 then the following macros need to be defined (examples are
1842 from include/configs/lwmon.h): 1842 from include/configs/lwmon.h):
1843 1843
1844 I2C_INIT 1844 I2C_INIT
1845 1845
1846 (Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C 1846 (Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C
1847 controller or configure ports. 1847 controller or configure ports.
1848 1848
1849 eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SCL) 1849 eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SCL)
1850 1850
1851 I2C_ACTIVE 1851 I2C_ACTIVE
1852 1852
1853 The code necessary to make the I2C data line active 1853 The code necessary to make the I2C data line active
1854 (driven). If the data line is open collector, this 1854 (driven). If the data line is open collector, this
1855 define can be null. 1855 define can be null.
1856 1856
1857 eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SDA) 1857 eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SDA)
1858 1858
1859 I2C_TRISTATE 1859 I2C_TRISTATE
1860 1860
1861 The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated 1861 The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated
1862 (inactive). If the data line is open collector, this 1862 (inactive). If the data line is open collector, this
1863 define can be null. 1863 define can be null.
1864 1864
1865 eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA) 1865 eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA)
1866 1866
1867 I2C_READ 1867 I2C_READ
1868 1868
1869 Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high, 1869 Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high,
1870 false if it is low. 1870 false if it is low.
1871 1871
1872 eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0) 1872 eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0)
1873 1873
1874 I2C_SDA(bit) 1874 I2C_SDA(bit)
1875 1875
1876 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it 1876 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it
1877 is false, it clears it (low). 1877 is false, it clears it (low).
1878 1878
1879 eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \ 1879 eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \
1880 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SDA; \ 1880 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SDA; \
1881 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA 1881 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA
1882 1882
1883 I2C_SCL(bit) 1883 I2C_SCL(bit)
1884 1884
1885 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it 1885 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it
1886 is false, it clears it (low). 1886 is false, it clears it (low).
1887 1887
1888 eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \ 1888 eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \
1889 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SCL; \ 1889 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SCL; \
1890 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL 1890 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL
1891 1891
1892 I2C_DELAY 1892 I2C_DELAY
1893 1893
1894 This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this 1894 This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this
1895 controls the rate of data transfer. The data rate thus 1895 controls the rate of data transfer. The data rate thus
1896 is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something 1896 is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something
1897 like: 1897 like:
1898 1898
1899 #define I2C_DELAY udelay(2) 1899 #define I2C_DELAY udelay(2)
1900 1900
1901 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA 1901 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA
1902 1902
1903 If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h), 1903 If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h),
1904 then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be 1904 then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be
1905 used as SCL / SDA. Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will 1905 used as SCL / SDA. Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will
1906 have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate. 1906 have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate.
1907 1907
1908 You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to 1908 You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to
1909 the generic GPIO functions. 1909 the generic GPIO functions.
1910 1910
1911 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD 1911 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD
1912 1912
1913 When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer 1913 When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer
1914 chips might think that the current transfer is still 1914 chips might think that the current transfer is still
1915 in progress. On some boards it is possible to access 1915 in progress. On some boards it is possible to access
1916 the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the 1916 the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the
1917 processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin 1917 processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin
1918 connected to the bus. If this option is defined a 1918 connected to the bus. If this option is defined a
1919 custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c 1919 custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c
1920 is run early in the boot sequence. 1920 is run early in the boot sequence.
1921 1921
1922 CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS 1922 CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
1923 1923
1924 This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which 1924 This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which
1925 must have a controller. At any point in time, only one bus is 1925 must have a controller. At any point in time, only one bus is
1926 active. To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command. 1926 active. To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command.
1927 Note that bus numbering is zero-based. 1927 Note that bus numbering is zero-based.
1928 1928
1929 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES 1929 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES
1930 1930
1931 This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped 1931 This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped
1932 when the 'i2c probe' command is issued. If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS 1932 when the 'i2c probe' command is issued. If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
1933 is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs. Otherwise, specify 1933 is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs. Otherwise, specify
1934 a 1D array of device addresses 1934 a 1D array of device addresses
1935 1935
1936 e.g. 1936 e.g.
1937 #undef CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS 1937 #undef CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
1938 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68} 1938 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68}
1939 1939
1940 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus 1940 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus
1941 1941
1942 #define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS 1942 #define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
1943 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}} 1943 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}}
1944 1944
1945 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1 1945 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1
1946 1946
1947 CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM 1947 CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
1948 1948
1949 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD. 1949 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD.
1950 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0. 1950 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0.
1951 1951
1952 CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM 1952 CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM
1953 1953
1954 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC. 1954 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC.
1955 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0. 1955 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0.
1956 1956
1957 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START 1957 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START
1958 1958
1959 defining this will force the i2c_read() function in 1959 defining this will force the i2c_read() function in
1960 the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start 1960 the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start
1961 between writing the address pointer and reading the 1961 between writing the address pointer and reading the
1962 data. If this define is omitted the default behaviour 1962 data. If this define is omitted the default behaviour
1963 of doing a stop-start sequence will be used. Most I2C 1963 of doing a stop-start sequence will be used. Most I2C
1964 devices can use either method, but some require one or 1964 devices can use either method, but some require one or
1965 the other. 1965 the other.
1966 1966
1967 - SPI Support: CONFIG_SPI 1967 - SPI Support: CONFIG_SPI
1968 1968
1969 Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with 1969 Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with
1970 SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and 1970 SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and
1971 D/As on the SACSng board) 1971 D/As on the SACSng board)
1972 1972
1973 CONFIG_SOFT_SPI 1973 CONFIG_SOFT_SPI
1974 1974
1975 Enables a software (bit-bang) SPI driver rather than 1975 Enables a software (bit-bang) SPI driver rather than
1976 using hardware support. This is a general purpose 1976 using hardware support. This is a general purpose
1977 driver that only requires three general I/O port pins 1977 driver that only requires three general I/O port pins
1978 (two outputs, one input) to function. If this is 1978 (two outputs, one input) to function. If this is
1979 defined, the board configuration must define several 1979 defined, the board configuration must define several
1980 SPI configuration items (port pins to use, etc). For 1980 SPI configuration items (port pins to use, etc). For
1981 an example, see include/configs/sacsng.h. 1981 an example, see include/configs/sacsng.h.
1982 1982
1983 CONFIG_HARD_SPI 1983 CONFIG_HARD_SPI
1984 1984
1985 Enables a hardware SPI driver for general-purpose reads 1985 Enables a hardware SPI driver for general-purpose reads
1986 and writes. As with CONFIG_SOFT_SPI, the board configuration 1986 and writes. As with CONFIG_SOFT_SPI, the board configuration
1987 must define a list of chip-select function pointers. 1987 must define a list of chip-select function pointers.
1988 Currently supported on some MPC8xxx processors. For an 1988 Currently supported on some MPC8xxx processors. For an
1989 example, see include/configs/mpc8349emds.h. 1989 example, see include/configs/mpc8349emds.h.
1990 1990
1991 CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT 1991 CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT
1992 Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed. 1992 Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed.
1993 default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100) /* 10 ms */ 1993 default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100) /* 10 ms */
1994 1994
1995 - FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA 1995 - FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA
1996 1996
1997 Enables FPGA subsystem. 1997 Enables FPGA subsystem.
1998 1998
1999 CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor> 1999 CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor>
2000 2000
2001 Enables support for specific chip vendors. 2001 Enables support for specific chip vendors.
2002 (ALTERA, XILINX) 2002 (ALTERA, XILINX)
2003 2003
2004 CONFIG_FPGA_<family> 2004 CONFIG_FPGA_<family>
2005 2005
2006 Enables support for FPGA family. 2006 Enables support for FPGA family.
2007 (SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX) 2007 (SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX)
2008 2008
2009 CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT 2009 CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT
2010 2010
2011 Specify the number of FPGA devices to support. 2011 Specify the number of FPGA devices to support.
2012 2012
2013 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK 2013 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK
2014 2014
2015 Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration. 2015 Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration.
2016 2016
2017 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY 2017 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY
2018 2018
2019 Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy 2019 Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy
2020 status by the configuration function. This option 2020 status by the configuration function. This option
2021 will require a board or device specific function to 2021 will require a board or device specific function to
2022 be written. 2022 be written.
2023 2023
2024 CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY 2024 CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY
2025 2025
2026 If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA 2026 If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA
2027 configuration driver. 2027 configuration driver.
2028 2028
2029 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC 2029 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC
2030 Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration 2030 Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration
2031 2031
2032 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR 2032 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR
2033 2033
2034 Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile 2034 Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile
2035 loading. For example, abort during Virtex II 2035 loading. For example, abort during Virtex II
2036 configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which 2036 configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which
2037 indicated a CRC error). 2037 indicated a CRC error).
2038 2038
2039 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT 2039 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT
2040 2040
2041 Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to de-assert 2041 Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to de-assert
2042 after PROB_B has been de-asserted during a Virtex II 2042 after PROB_B has been de-asserted during a Virtex II
2043 FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500 2043 FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500
2044 ms. 2044 ms.
2045 2045
2046 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY 2046 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY
2047 2047
2048 Maximum time to wait for BUSY to de-assert during 2048 Maximum time to wait for BUSY to de-assert during
2049 Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms. 2049 Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms.
2050 2050
2051 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG 2051 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG
2052 2052
2053 Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is 2053 Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is
2054 200 ms. 2054 200 ms.
2055 2055
2056 - Configuration Management: 2056 - Configuration Management:
2057 CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET 2057 CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET
2058 2058
2059 Some SoCs need special image types (e.g. U-Boot binary 2059 Some SoCs need special image types (e.g. U-Boot binary
2060 with a special header) as build targets. By defining 2060 with a special header) as build targets. By defining
2061 CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET in the SoC / board header, this 2061 CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET in the SoC / board header, this
2062 special image will be automatically built upon calling 2062 special image will be automatically built upon calling
2063 make / buildman. 2063 make / buildman.
2064 2064
2065 CONFIG_IDENT_STRING 2065 CONFIG_IDENT_STRING
2066 2066
2067 If defined, this string will be added to the U-Boot 2067 If defined, this string will be added to the U-Boot
2068 version information (U_BOOT_VERSION) 2068 version information (U_BOOT_VERSION)
2069 2069
2070 - Vendor Parameter Protection: 2070 - Vendor Parameter Protection:
2071 2071
2072 U-Boot considers the values of the environment 2072 U-Boot considers the values of the environment
2073 variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and 2073 variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and
2074 "ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that 2074 "ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that
2075 are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and 2075 are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and
2076 protects these variables from casual modification by 2076 protects these variables from casual modification by
2077 the user. Once set, these variables are read-only, 2077 the user. Once set, these variables are read-only,
2078 and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can 2078 and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can
2079 change this behaviour: 2079 change this behaviour:
2080 2080
2081 If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config 2081 If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config
2082 file, the write protection for vendor parameters is 2082 file, the write protection for vendor parameters is
2083 completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete 2083 completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete
2084 these parameters. 2084 these parameters.
2085 2085
2086 Alternatively, if you define _both_ an ethaddr in the 2086 Alternatively, if you define _both_ an ethaddr in the
2087 default env _and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default 2087 default env _and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default
2088 Ethernet address is installed in the environment, 2088 Ethernet address is installed in the environment,
2089 which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The 2089 which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The
2090 serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains 2090 serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains
2091 read-only.] 2091 read-only.]
2092 2092
2093 The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way 2093 The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way
2094 for any variable by configuring the type of access 2094 for any variable by configuring the type of access
2095 to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable 2095 to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable
2096 or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC. 2096 or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC.
2097 2097
2098 - Protected RAM: 2098 - Protected RAM:
2099 CONFIG_PRAM 2099 CONFIG_PRAM
2100 2100
2101 Define this variable to enable the reservation of 2101 Define this variable to enable the reservation of
2102 "protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten 2102 "protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten
2103 by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of 2103 by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of
2104 kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite 2104 kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite
2105 this default value by defining an environment 2105 this default value by defining an environment
2106 variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to 2106 variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to
2107 reserve. Note that the board info structure will 2107 reserve. Note that the board info structure will
2108 still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is 2108 still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is
2109 reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will 2109 reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will
2110 automatically be defined to hold the amount of 2110 automatically be defined to hold the amount of
2111 remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot 2111 remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot
2112 argument to Linux, for instance like that: 2112 argument to Linux, for instance like that:
2113 2113
2114 setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem} 2114 setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem}
2115 saveenv 2115 saveenv
2116 2116
2117 This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory, 2117 This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory,
2118 either, which results in a memory region that will 2118 either, which results in a memory region that will
2119 not be affected by reboots. 2119 not be affected by reboots.
2120 2120
2121 *WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic 2121 *WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic
2122 detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that 2122 detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that
2123 this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the 2123 this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the
2124 following board configurations are known to be 2124 following board configurations are known to be
2125 "pRAM-clean": 2125 "pRAM-clean":
2126 2126
2127 IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx, 2127 IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx,
2128 HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON, 2128 HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON,
2129 FLAGADM 2129 FLAGADM
2130 2130
2131 - Access to physical memory region (> 4GB) 2131 - Access to physical memory region (> 4GB)
2132 Some basic support is provided for operations on memory not 2132 Some basic support is provided for operations on memory not
2133 normally accessible to U-Boot - e.g. some architectures 2133 normally accessible to U-Boot - e.g. some architectures
2134 support access to more than 4GB of memory on 32-bit 2134 support access to more than 4GB of memory on 32-bit
2135 machines using physical address extension or similar. 2135 machines using physical address extension or similar.
2136 Define CONFIG_PHYSMEM to access this basic support, which 2136 Define CONFIG_PHYSMEM to access this basic support, which
2137 currently only supports clearing the memory. 2137 currently only supports clearing the memory.
2138 2138
2139 - Error Recovery: 2139 - Error Recovery:
2140 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT 2140 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT
2141 2141
2142 This variable defines the number of retries for 2142 This variable defines the number of retries for
2143 network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP 2143 network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP
2144 before giving up the operation. If not defined, a 2144 before giving up the operation. If not defined, a
2145 default value of 5 is used. 2145 default value of 5 is used.
2146 2146
2147 CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT 2147 CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT
2148 2148
2149 Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds. 2149 Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds.
2150 2150
2151 CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 2151 CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT
2152 2152
2153 Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol. 2153 Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol.
2154 If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command, 2154 If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command,
2155 try longer timeout such as 2155 try longer timeout such as
2156 #define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL 2156 #define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL
2157 2157
2158 - Command Interpreter: 2158 - Command Interpreter:
2159 CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT_HUSH_PS2 2159 CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT_HUSH_PS2
2160 2160
2161 This defines the secondary prompt string, which is 2161 This defines the secondary prompt string, which is
2162 printed when the command interpreter needs more input 2162 printed when the command interpreter needs more input
2163 to complete a command. Usually "> ". 2163 to complete a command. Usually "> ".
2164 2164
2165 Note: 2165 Note:
2166 2166
2167 In the current implementation, the local variables 2167 In the current implementation, the local variables
2168 space and global environment variables space are 2168 space and global environment variables space are
2169 separated. Local variables are those you define by 2169 separated. Local variables are those you define by
2170 simply typing `name=value'. To access a local 2170 simply typing `name=value'. To access a local
2171 variable later on, you have write `$name' or 2171 variable later on, you have write `$name' or
2172 `${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable 2172 `${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable
2173 directly type `$name' at the command prompt. 2173 directly type `$name' at the command prompt.
2174 2174
2175 Global environment variables are those you use 2175 Global environment variables are those you use
2176 setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored 2176 setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored
2177 in such a variable, you need to use the run command, 2177 in such a variable, you need to use the run command,
2178 and you must not use the '$' sign to access them. 2178 and you must not use the '$' sign to access them.
2179 2179
2180 To store commands and special characters in a 2180 To store commands and special characters in a
2181 variable, please use double quotation marks 2181 variable, please use double quotation marks
2182 surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead 2182 surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead
2183 of the backslashes before semicolons and special 2183 of the backslashes before semicolons and special
2184 symbols. 2184 symbols.
2185 2185
2186 - Command Line Editing and History: 2186 - Command Line Editing and History:
2187 CONFIG_CMDLINE_PS_SUPPORT 2187 CONFIG_CMDLINE_PS_SUPPORT
2188 2188
2189 Enable support for changing the command prompt string 2189 Enable support for changing the command prompt string
2190 at run-time. Only static string is supported so far. 2190 at run-time. Only static string is supported so far.
2191 The string is obtained from environment variables PS1 2191 The string is obtained from environment variables PS1
2192 and PS2. 2192 and PS2.
2193 2193
2194 - Default Environment: 2194 - Default Environment:
2195 CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS 2195 CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS
2196 2196
2197 Define this to contain any number of null terminated 2197 Define this to contain any number of null terminated
2198 strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of 2198 strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of
2199 the default environment compiled into the boot image. 2199 the default environment compiled into the boot image.
2200 2200
2201 For example, place something like this in your 2201 For example, place something like this in your
2202 board's config file: 2202 board's config file:
2203 2203
2204 #define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \ 2204 #define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \
2205 "myvar1=value1\0" \ 2205 "myvar1=value1\0" \
2206 "myvar2=value2\0" 2206 "myvar2=value2\0"
2207 2207
2208 Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the 2208 Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the
2209 internal format how the environment is stored by the 2209 internal format how the environment is stored by the
2210 U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported 2210 U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported
2211 interface! Although it is unlikely that this format 2211 interface! Although it is unlikely that this format
2212 will change soon, there is no guarantee either. 2212 will change soon, there is no guarantee either.
2213 You better know what you are doing here. 2213 You better know what you are doing here.
2214 2214
2215 Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is 2215 Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is
2216 discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset 2216 discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset
2217 the environment like the "source" command or the 2217 the environment like the "source" command or the
2218 boot command first. 2218 boot command first.
2219 2219
2220 CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_RUNTIME_CONFIG 2220 CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_RUNTIME_CONFIG
2221 2221
2222 Define this in order to add variables describing certain 2222 Define this in order to add variables describing certain
2223 run-time determined information about the hardware to the 2223 run-time determined information about the hardware to the
2224 environment. These will be named board_name, board_rev. 2224 environment. These will be named board_name, board_rev.
2225 2225
2226 CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT 2226 CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT
2227 2227
2228 Normally the environment is loaded when the board is 2228 Normally the environment is loaded when the board is
2229 initialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits 2229 initialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits
2230 that so that the environment is not available until 2230 that so that the environment is not available until
2231 explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL 2231 explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
2232 this is instead controlled by the value of 2232 this is instead controlled by the value of
2233 /config/load-environment. 2233 /config/load-environment.
2234 2234
2235 - Serial Flash support 2235 - Serial Flash support
2236 Usage requires an initial 'sf probe' to define the serial 2236 Usage requires an initial 'sf probe' to define the serial
2237 flash parameters, followed by read/write/erase/update 2237 flash parameters, followed by read/write/erase/update
2238 commands. 2238 commands.
2239 2239
2240 The following defaults may be provided by the platform 2240 The following defaults may be provided by the platform
2241 to handle the common case when only a single serial 2241 to handle the common case when only a single serial
2242 flash is present on the system. 2242 flash is present on the system.
2243 2243
2244 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_BUS Bus identifier 2244 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_BUS Bus identifier
2245 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_CS Chip-select 2245 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_CS Chip-select
2246 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_MODE (see include/spi.h) 2246 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_MODE (see include/spi.h)
2247 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_SPEED in Hz 2247 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_SPEED in Hz
2248 2248
2249 2249
2250 - TFTP Fixed UDP Port: 2250 - TFTP Fixed UDP Port:
2251 CONFIG_TFTP_PORT 2251 CONFIG_TFTP_PORT
2252 2252
2253 If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp 2253 If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp
2254 is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value. 2254 is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value.
2255 If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port 2255 If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port
2256 number generator is used. 2256 number generator is used.
2257 2257
2258 Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply 2258 Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply
2259 the TFTP UDP destination port value. If tftpdstp isn't 2259 the TFTP UDP destination port value. If tftpdstp isn't
2260 defined, the normal port 69 is used. 2260 defined, the normal port 69 is used.
2261 2261
2262 The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to 2262 The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to
2263 blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured 2263 blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured
2264 target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of 2264 target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of
2265 "punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing 2265 "punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing
2266 the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally. 2266 the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally.
2267 A better solution is to properly configure the firewall, 2267 A better solution is to properly configure the firewall,
2268 but sometimes that is not allowed. 2268 but sometimes that is not allowed.
2269 2269
2270 - bootcount support:
2271 CONFIG_AT91SAM9XE
2272 enable special bootcounter support on at91sam9xe based boards.
2273
2274 - Show boot progress: 2270 - Show boot progress:
2275 CONFIG_SHOW_BOOT_PROGRESS 2271 CONFIG_SHOW_BOOT_PROGRESS
2276 2272
2277 Defining this option allows to add some board- 2273 Defining this option allows to add some board-
2278 specific code (calling a user-provided function 2274 specific code (calling a user-provided function
2279 "show_boot_progress(int)") that enables you to show 2275 "show_boot_progress(int)") that enables you to show
2280 the system's boot progress on some display (for 2276 the system's boot progress on some display (for
2281 example, some LED's) on your board. At the moment, 2277 example, some LED's) on your board. At the moment,
2282 the following checkpoints are implemented: 2278 the following checkpoints are implemented:
2283 2279
2284 2280
2285 Legacy uImage format: 2281 Legacy uImage format:
2286 2282
2287 Arg Where When 2283 Arg Where When
2288 1 common/cmd_bootm.c before attempting to boot an image 2284 1 common/cmd_bootm.c before attempting to boot an image
2289 -1 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad magic number 2285 -1 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad magic number
2290 2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct magic number 2286 2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct magic number
2291 -2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad checksum 2287 -2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad checksum
2292 3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct checksum 2288 3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct checksum
2293 -3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has bad checksum 2289 -3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has bad checksum
2294 4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has correct checksum 2290 4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has correct checksum
2295 -4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image is for unsupported architecture 2291 -4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image is for unsupported architecture
2296 5 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK 2292 5 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK
2297 -5 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong Image Type (not kernel, multi) 2293 -5 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong Image Type (not kernel, multi)
2298 6 common/cmd_bootm.c Image Type check OK 2294 6 common/cmd_bootm.c Image Type check OK
2299 -6 common/cmd_bootm.c gunzip uncompression error 2295 -6 common/cmd_bootm.c gunzip uncompression error
2300 -7 common/cmd_bootm.c Unimplemented compression type 2296 -7 common/cmd_bootm.c Unimplemented compression type
2301 7 common/cmd_bootm.c Uncompression OK 2297 7 common/cmd_bootm.c Uncompression OK
2302 8 common/cmd_bootm.c No uncompress/copy overwrite error 2298 8 common/cmd_bootm.c No uncompress/copy overwrite error
2303 -9 common/cmd_bootm.c Unsupported OS (not Linux, BSD, VxWorks, QNX) 2299 -9 common/cmd_bootm.c Unsupported OS (not Linux, BSD, VxWorks, QNX)
2304 2300
2305 9 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification 2301 9 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification
2306 -10 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad magic number 2302 -10 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad magic number
2307 -11 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad checksum 2303 -11 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad checksum
2308 10 common/image.c Ramdisk header is OK 2304 10 common/image.c Ramdisk header is OK
2309 -12 common/image.c Ramdisk data has bad checksum 2305 -12 common/image.c Ramdisk data has bad checksum
2310 11 common/image.c Ramdisk data has correct checksum 2306 11 common/image.c Ramdisk data has correct checksum
2311 12 common/image.c Ramdisk verification complete, start loading 2307 12 common/image.c Ramdisk verification complete, start loading
2312 -13 common/image.c Wrong Image Type (not PPC Linux ramdisk) 2308 -13 common/image.c Wrong Image Type (not PPC Linux ramdisk)
2313 13 common/image.c Start multifile image verification 2309 13 common/image.c Start multifile image verification
2314 14 common/image.c No initial ramdisk, no multifile, continue. 2310 14 common/image.c No initial ramdisk, no multifile, continue.
2315 2311
2316 15 arch/<arch>/lib/bootm.c All preparation done, transferring control to OS 2312 15 arch/<arch>/lib/bootm.c All preparation done, transferring control to OS
2317 2313
2318 -30 arch/powerpc/lib/board.c Fatal error, hang the system 2314 -30 arch/powerpc/lib/board.c Fatal error, hang the system
2319 -31 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_output_backlog() 2315 -31 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_output_backlog()
2320 -32 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_run_single() 2316 -32 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_run_single()
2321 2317
2322 34 common/cmd_doc.c before loading a Image from a DOC device 2318 34 common/cmd_doc.c before loading a Image from a DOC device
2323 -35 common/cmd_doc.c Bad usage of "doc" command 2319 -35 common/cmd_doc.c Bad usage of "doc" command
2324 35 common/cmd_doc.c correct usage of "doc" command 2320 35 common/cmd_doc.c correct usage of "doc" command
2325 -36 common/cmd_doc.c No boot device 2321 -36 common/cmd_doc.c No boot device
2326 36 common/cmd_doc.c correct boot device 2322 36 common/cmd_doc.c correct boot device
2327 -37 common/cmd_doc.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device 2323 -37 common/cmd_doc.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device
2328 37 common/cmd_doc.c correct chip ID found, device available 2324 37 common/cmd_doc.c correct chip ID found, device available
2329 -38 common/cmd_doc.c Read Error on boot device 2325 -38 common/cmd_doc.c Read Error on boot device
2330 38 common/cmd_doc.c reading Image header from DOC device OK 2326 38 common/cmd_doc.c reading Image header from DOC device OK
2331 -39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has bad magic number 2327 -39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has bad magic number
2332 39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number 2328 39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number
2333 -40 common/cmd_doc.c Error reading Image from DOC device 2329 -40 common/cmd_doc.c Error reading Image from DOC device
2334 40 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number 2330 40 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number
2335 41 common/cmd_ide.c before loading a Image from a IDE device 2331 41 common/cmd_ide.c before loading a Image from a IDE device
2336 -42 common/cmd_ide.c Bad usage of "ide" command 2332 -42 common/cmd_ide.c Bad usage of "ide" command
2337 42 common/cmd_ide.c correct usage of "ide" command 2333 42 common/cmd_ide.c correct usage of "ide" command
2338 -43 common/cmd_ide.c No boot device 2334 -43 common/cmd_ide.c No boot device
2339 43 common/cmd_ide.c boot device found 2335 43 common/cmd_ide.c boot device found
2340 -44 common/cmd_ide.c Device not available 2336 -44 common/cmd_ide.c Device not available
2341 44 common/cmd_ide.c Device available 2337 44 common/cmd_ide.c Device available
2342 -45 common/cmd_ide.c wrong partition selected 2338 -45 common/cmd_ide.c wrong partition selected
2343 45 common/cmd_ide.c partition selected 2339 45 common/cmd_ide.c partition selected
2344 -46 common/cmd_ide.c Unknown partition table 2340 -46 common/cmd_ide.c Unknown partition table
2345 46 common/cmd_ide.c valid partition table found 2341 46 common/cmd_ide.c valid partition table found
2346 -47 common/cmd_ide.c Invalid partition type 2342 -47 common/cmd_ide.c Invalid partition type
2347 47 common/cmd_ide.c correct partition type 2343 47 common/cmd_ide.c correct partition type
2348 -48 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image Header on boot device 2344 -48 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image Header on boot device
2349 48 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image Header from IDE device OK 2345 48 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image Header from IDE device OK
2350 -49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad magic number 2346 -49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad magic number
2351 49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct magic number 2347 49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct magic number
2352 -50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad checksum 2348 -50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad checksum
2353 50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct checksum 2349 50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct checksum
2354 -51 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image from IDE device 2350 -51 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image from IDE device
2355 51 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image from IDE device OK 2351 51 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image from IDE device OK
2356 52 common/cmd_nand.c before loading a Image from a NAND device 2352 52 common/cmd_nand.c before loading a Image from a NAND device
2357 -53 common/cmd_nand.c Bad usage of "nand" command 2353 -53 common/cmd_nand.c Bad usage of "nand" command
2358 53 common/cmd_nand.c correct usage of "nand" command 2354 53 common/cmd_nand.c correct usage of "nand" command
2359 -54 common/cmd_nand.c No boot device 2355 -54 common/cmd_nand.c No boot device
2360 54 common/cmd_nand.c boot device found 2356 54 common/cmd_nand.c boot device found
2361 -55 common/cmd_nand.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device 2357 -55 common/cmd_nand.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device
2362 55 common/cmd_nand.c correct chip ID found, device available 2358 55 common/cmd_nand.c correct chip ID found, device available
2363 -56 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image Header on boot device 2359 -56 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image Header on boot device
2364 56 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image Header from NAND device OK 2360 56 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image Header from NAND device OK
2365 -57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has bad magic number 2361 -57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has bad magic number
2366 57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has correct magic number 2362 57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has correct magic number
2367 -58 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image from NAND device 2363 -58 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image from NAND device
2368 58 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image from NAND device OK 2364 58 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image from NAND device OK
2369 2365
2370 -60 common/env_common.c Environment has a bad CRC, using default 2366 -60 common/env_common.c Environment has a bad CRC, using default
2371 2367
2372 64 net/eth.c starting with Ethernet configuration. 2368 64 net/eth.c starting with Ethernet configuration.
2373 -64 net/eth.c no Ethernet found. 2369 -64 net/eth.c no Ethernet found.
2374 65 net/eth.c Ethernet found. 2370 65 net/eth.c Ethernet found.
2375 2371
2376 -80 common/cmd_net.c usage wrong 2372 -80 common/cmd_net.c usage wrong
2377 80 common/cmd_net.c before calling net_loop() 2373 80 common/cmd_net.c before calling net_loop()
2378 -81 common/cmd_net.c some error in net_loop() occurred 2374 -81 common/cmd_net.c some error in net_loop() occurred
2379 81 common/cmd_net.c net_loop() back without error 2375 81 common/cmd_net.c net_loop() back without error
2380 -82 common/cmd_net.c size == 0 (File with size 0 loaded) 2376 -82 common/cmd_net.c size == 0 (File with size 0 loaded)
2381 82 common/cmd_net.c trying automatic boot 2377 82 common/cmd_net.c trying automatic boot
2382 83 common/cmd_net.c running "source" command 2378 83 common/cmd_net.c running "source" command
2383 -83 common/cmd_net.c some error in automatic boot or "source" command 2379 -83 common/cmd_net.c some error in automatic boot or "source" command
2384 84 common/cmd_net.c end without errors 2380 84 common/cmd_net.c end without errors
2385 2381
2386 FIT uImage format: 2382 FIT uImage format:
2387 2383
2388 Arg Where When 2384 Arg Where When
2389 100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has correct format 2385 100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has correct format
2390 -100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has incorrect format 2386 -100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has incorrect format
2391 101 common/cmd_bootm.c No Kernel subimage unit name, using configuration 2387 101 common/cmd_bootm.c No Kernel subimage unit name, using configuration
2392 -101 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get configuration for kernel subimage 2388 -101 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get configuration for kernel subimage
2393 102 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel unit name specified 2389 102 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel unit name specified
2394 -103 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage node offset 2390 -103 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage node offset
2395 103 common/cmd_bootm.c Found configuration node 2391 103 common/cmd_bootm.c Found configuration node
2396 104 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage node offset 2392 104 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage node offset
2397 -104 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification failed 2393 -104 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification failed
2398 105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification OK 2394 105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification OK
2399 -105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage is for unsupported architecture 2395 -105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage is for unsupported architecture
2400 106 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK 2396 106 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK
2401 -106 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage has wrong type 2397 -106 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage has wrong type
2402 107 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage type OK 2398 107 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage type OK
2403 -107 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage data/size 2399 -107 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage data/size
2404 108 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage data/size 2400 108 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage data/size
2405 -108 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong image type (not legacy, FIT) 2401 -108 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong image type (not legacy, FIT)
2406 -109 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage type 2402 -109 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage type
2407 -110 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage comp 2403 -110 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage comp
2408 -111 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage os 2404 -111 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage os
2409 -112 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage load address 2405 -112 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage load address
2410 -113 common/cmd_bootm.c Image uncompress/copy overwrite error 2406 -113 common/cmd_bootm.c Image uncompress/copy overwrite error
2411 2407
2412 120 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification 2408 120 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification
2413 -120 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has incorrect format 2409 -120 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has incorrect format
2414 121 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has correct format 2410 121 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has correct format
2415 122 common/image.c No ramdisk subimage unit name, using configuration 2411 122 common/image.c No ramdisk subimage unit name, using configuration
2416 -122 common/image.c Can't get configuration for ramdisk subimage 2412 -122 common/image.c Can't get configuration for ramdisk subimage
2417 123 common/image.c Ramdisk unit name specified 2413 123 common/image.c Ramdisk unit name specified
2418 -124 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage node offset 2414 -124 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage node offset
2419 125 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage node offset 2415 125 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage node offset
2420 -125 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification failed 2416 -125 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification failed
2421 126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification OK 2417 126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification OK
2422 -126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage for unsupported architecture 2418 -126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage for unsupported architecture
2423 127 common/image.c Architecture check OK 2419 127 common/image.c Architecture check OK
2424 -127 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage data/size 2420 -127 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage data/size
2425 128 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage data/size 2421 128 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage data/size
2426 129 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk load address 2422 129 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk load address
2427 -129 common/image.c Got ramdisk load address 2423 -129 common/image.c Got ramdisk load address
2428 2424
2429 -130 common/cmd_doc.c Incorrect FIT image format 2425 -130 common/cmd_doc.c Incorrect FIT image format
2430 131 common/cmd_doc.c FIT image format OK 2426 131 common/cmd_doc.c FIT image format OK
2431 2427
2432 -140 common/cmd_ide.c Incorrect FIT image format 2428 -140 common/cmd_ide.c Incorrect FIT image format
2433 141 common/cmd_ide.c FIT image format OK 2429 141 common/cmd_ide.c FIT image format OK
2434 2430
2435 -150 common/cmd_nand.c Incorrect FIT image format 2431 -150 common/cmd_nand.c Incorrect FIT image format
2436 151 common/cmd_nand.c FIT image format OK 2432 151 common/cmd_nand.c FIT image format OK
2437 2433
2438 - legacy image format: 2434 - legacy image format:
2439 CONFIG_IMAGE_FORMAT_LEGACY 2435 CONFIG_IMAGE_FORMAT_LEGACY
2440 enables the legacy image format support in U-Boot. 2436 enables the legacy image format support in U-Boot.
2441 2437
2442 Default: 2438 Default:
2443 enabled if CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE is not defined. 2439 enabled if CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE is not defined.
2444 2440
2445 CONFIG_DISABLE_IMAGE_LEGACY 2441 CONFIG_DISABLE_IMAGE_LEGACY
2446 disable the legacy image format 2442 disable the legacy image format
2447 2443
2448 This define is introduced, as the legacy image format is 2444 This define is introduced, as the legacy image format is
2449 enabled per default for backward compatibility. 2445 enabled per default for backward compatibility.
2450 2446
2451 - Standalone program support: 2447 - Standalone program support:
2452 CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR 2448 CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR
2453 2449
2454 This option defines a board specific value for the 2450 This option defines a board specific value for the
2455 address where standalone program gets loaded, thus 2451 address where standalone program gets loaded, thus
2456 overwriting the architecture dependent default 2452 overwriting the architecture dependent default
2457 settings. 2453 settings.
2458 2454
2459 - Frame Buffer Address: 2455 - Frame Buffer Address:
2460 CONFIG_FB_ADDR 2456 CONFIG_FB_ADDR
2461 2457
2462 Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific 2458 Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific
2463 address for frame buffer. This is typically the case 2459 address for frame buffer. This is typically the case
2464 when using a graphics controller has separate video 2460 when using a graphics controller has separate video
2465 memory. U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at 2461 memory. U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at
2466 the given address instead of dynamically reserving it 2462 the given address instead of dynamically reserving it
2467 in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs 2463 in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs
2468 the memory for the frame buffer depending on the 2464 the memory for the frame buffer depending on the
2469 configured panel size. 2465 configured panel size.
2470 2466
2471 Please see board_init_f function. 2467 Please see board_init_f function.
2472 2468
2473 - Automatic software updates via TFTP server 2469 - Automatic software updates via TFTP server
2474 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP 2470 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP
2475 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX 2471 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX
2476 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX 2472 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX
2477 2473
2478 These options enable and control the auto-update feature; 2474 These options enable and control the auto-update feature;
2479 for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update. 2475 for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update.
2480 2476
2481 - MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support) 2477 - MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support)
2482 CONFIG_MTD_DEVICE 2478 CONFIG_MTD_DEVICE
2483 2479
2484 Adds the MTD device infrastructure from the Linux kernel. 2480 Adds the MTD device infrastructure from the Linux kernel.
2485 Needed for mtdparts command support. 2481 Needed for mtdparts command support.
2486 2482
2487 CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS 2483 CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS
2488 2484
2489 Adds the MTD partitioning infrastructure from the Linux 2485 Adds the MTD partitioning infrastructure from the Linux
2490 kernel. Needed for UBI support. 2486 kernel. Needed for UBI support.
2491 2487
2492 - UBI support 2488 - UBI support
2493 CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG 2489 CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG
2494 2490
2495 Make the verbose messages from UBI stop printing. This leaves 2491 Make the verbose messages from UBI stop printing. This leaves
2496 warnings and errors enabled. 2492 warnings and errors enabled.
2497 2493
2498 2494
2499 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD 2495 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD
2500 This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest 2496 This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest
2501 erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks 2497 erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks
2502 of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing 2498 of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing
2503 wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase 2499 wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase
2504 counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter. 2500 counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter.
2505 2501
2506 The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and 2502 The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and
2507 other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more. 2503 other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more.
2508 However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock 2504 However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock
2509 life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g., 2505 life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g.,
2510 to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2). 2506 to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2).
2511 2507
2512 default: 4096 2508 default: 4096
2513 2509
2514 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT 2510 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT
2515 This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI 2511 This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI
2516 expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the 2512 expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the
2517 underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR 2513 underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR
2518 flash), this value is ignored. 2514 flash), this value is ignored.
2519 2515
2520 NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM 2516 NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM
2521 (Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime. 2517 (Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime.
2522 The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks 2518 The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks
2523 then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)", 2519 then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)",
2524 which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total 2520 which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total
2525 count of eraseblocks on the chip). 2521 count of eraseblocks on the chip).
2526 2522
2527 To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to 2523 To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to
2528 reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks 2524 reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks
2529 handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire 2525 handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire
2530 NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means 2526 NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means
2531 that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad 2527 that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad
2532 eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same 2528 eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same
2533 size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a 2529 size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a
2534 partition. 2530 partition.
2535 2531
2536 default: 20 2532 default: 20
2537 2533
2538 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP 2534 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP
2539 Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device 2535 Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device
2540 in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it 2536 in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it
2541 only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device. 2537 only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device.
2542 The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach 2538 The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach
2543 the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where 2539 the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where
2544 attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install 2540 attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install
2545 a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter 2541 a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter
2546 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note 2542 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note
2547 that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations 2543 that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations
2548 without fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap 2544 without fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap
2549 fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps. 2545 fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps.
2550 2546
2551 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT 2547 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT
2552 Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images 2548 Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images
2553 without a fastmap. 2549 without a fastmap.
2554 default: 0 2550 default: 0
2555 2551
2556 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FM_DEBUG 2552 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FM_DEBUG
2557 Enable UBI fastmap debug 2553 Enable UBI fastmap debug
2558 default: 0 2554 default: 0
2559 2555
2560 - UBIFS support 2556 - UBIFS support
2561 CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG 2557 CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG
2562 2558
2563 Make the verbose messages from UBIFS stop printing. This leaves 2559 Make the verbose messages from UBIFS stop printing. This leaves
2564 warnings and errors enabled. 2560 warnings and errors enabled.
2565 2561
2566 - SPL framework 2562 - SPL framework
2567 CONFIG_SPL 2563 CONFIG_SPL
2568 Enable building of SPL globally. 2564 Enable building of SPL globally.
2569 2565
2570 CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT 2566 CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT
2571 LDSCRIPT for linking the SPL binary. 2567 LDSCRIPT for linking the SPL binary.
2572 2568
2573 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT 2569 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT
2574 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included. 2570 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included.
2575 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory 2571 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory
2576 used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it. 2572 used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
2577 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE 2573 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
2578 must not be both defined at the same time. 2574 must not be both defined at the same time.
2579 2575
2580 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE 2576 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE
2581 Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and 2577 Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and
2582 linker lists sections), BSS excluded. 2578 linker lists sections), BSS excluded.
2583 When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does 2579 When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does
2584 not exceed it. 2580 not exceed it.
2585 2581
2586 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE 2582 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE
2587 TEXT_BASE for linking the SPL binary. 2583 TEXT_BASE for linking the SPL binary.
2588 2584
2589 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE 2585 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE
2590 Address to relocate to. If unspecified, this is equal to 2586 Address to relocate to. If unspecified, this is equal to
2591 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done). 2587 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done).
2592 2588
2593 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR 2589 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR
2594 Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary. 2590 Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary.
2595 2591
2596 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE 2592 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
2597 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS. 2593 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS.
2598 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used 2594 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used
2599 by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it. 2595 by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
2600 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE 2596 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
2601 must not be both defined at the same time. 2597 must not be both defined at the same time.
2602 2598
2603 CONFIG_SPL_STACK 2599 CONFIG_SPL_STACK
2604 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use 2600 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use
2605 2601
2606 CONFIG_SPL_PANIC_ON_RAW_IMAGE 2602 CONFIG_SPL_PANIC_ON_RAW_IMAGE
2607 When defined, SPL will panic() if the image it has 2603 When defined, SPL will panic() if the image it has
2608 loaded does not have a signature. 2604 loaded does not have a signature.
2609 Defining this is useful when code which loads images 2605 Defining this is useful when code which loads images
2610 in SPL cannot guarantee that absolutely all read errors 2606 in SPL cannot guarantee that absolutely all read errors
2611 will be caught. 2607 will be caught.
2612 An example is the LPC32XX MLC NAND driver, which will 2608 An example is the LPC32XX MLC NAND driver, which will
2613 consider that a completely unreadable NAND block is bad, 2609 consider that a completely unreadable NAND block is bad,
2614 and thus should be skipped silently. 2610 and thus should be skipped silently.
2615 2611
2616 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK 2612 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK
2617 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after 2613 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after
2618 relocation. If unspecified, this is equal to 2614 relocation. If unspecified, this is equal to
2619 CONFIG_SPL_STACK. 2615 CONFIG_SPL_STACK.
2620 2616
2621 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START 2617 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START
2622 Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL. 2618 Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL.
2623 When this option is set the full malloc is used in SPL and 2619 When this option is set the full malloc is used in SPL and
2624 it is set up by spl_init() and before that, the simple malloc() 2620 it is set up by spl_init() and before that, the simple malloc()
2625 can be used if CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F is defined. 2621 can be used if CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F is defined.
2626 2622
2627 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE 2623 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE
2628 The size of the malloc pool used in SPL. 2624 The size of the malloc pool used in SPL.
2629 2625
2630 CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT 2626 CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT
2631 Enable booting directly to an OS from SPL. 2627 Enable booting directly to an OS from SPL.
2632 See also: doc/README.falcon 2628 See also: doc/README.falcon
2633 2629
2634 CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT 2630 CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT
2635 For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information 2631 For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information
2636 about the running system. 2632 about the running system.
2637 2633
2638 CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL 2634 CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL
2639 Arch init code should be built for a very small image 2635 Arch init code should be built for a very small image
2640 2636
2641 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_PARTITION 2637 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_PARTITION
2642 Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being 2638 Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being
2643 used in raw mode 2639 used in raw mode
2644 2640
2645 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR 2641 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR
2646 Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being 2642 Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being
2647 used in raw mode (for Falcon mode) 2643 used in raw mode (for Falcon mode)
2648 2644
2649 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR, 2645 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR,
2650 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS 2646 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS
2651 Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument 2647 Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument
2652 parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode 2648 parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode
2653 (for falcon mode) 2649 (for falcon mode)
2654 2650
2655 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_FS_BOOT_PARTITION 2651 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_FS_BOOT_PARTITION
2656 Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being 2652 Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being
2657 used in fs mode 2653 used in fs mode
2658 2654
2659 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME 2655 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME
2660 Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from filesystem 2656 Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from filesystem
2661 2657
2662 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME 2658 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME
2663 Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading 2659 Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading
2664 from filesystem (for Falcon mode) 2660 from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
2665 2661
2666 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_ARGS_NAME 2662 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_ARGS_NAME
2667 Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters 2663 Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters
2668 when reading from filesystem (for Falcon mode) 2664 when reading from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
2669 2665
2670 CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND 2666 CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND
2671 Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that 2667 Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that
2672 start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before 2668 start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before
2673 continuing (the hardware starts execution after just 2669 continuing (the hardware starts execution after just
2674 loading the first page rather than the full 4K). 2670 loading the first page rather than the full 4K).
2675 2671
2676 CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE 2672 CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE
2677 Avoid SPL relocation 2673 Avoid SPL relocation
2678 2674
2679 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE 2675 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE
2680 Include nand_base.c in the SPL. Requires 2676 Include nand_base.c in the SPL. Requires
2681 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS. 2677 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS.
2682 2678
2683 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS 2679 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS
2684 SPL uses normal NAND drivers, not minimal drivers. 2680 SPL uses normal NAND drivers, not minimal drivers.
2685 2681
2686 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_ECC 2682 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_ECC
2687 Include standard software ECC in the SPL 2683 Include standard software ECC in the SPL
2688 2684
2689 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE 2685 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE
2690 Support for NAND boot using simple NAND drivers that 2686 Support for NAND boot using simple NAND drivers that
2691 expose the cmd_ctrl() interface. 2687 expose the cmd_ctrl() interface.
2692 2688
2693 CONFIG_SPL_UBI 2689 CONFIG_SPL_UBI
2694 Support for a lightweight UBI (fastmap) scanner and 2690 Support for a lightweight UBI (fastmap) scanner and
2695 loader 2691 loader
2696 2692
2697 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_RAW_ONLY 2693 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_RAW_ONLY
2698 Support to boot only raw u-boot.bin images. Use this only 2694 Support to boot only raw u-boot.bin images. Use this only
2699 if you need to save space. 2695 if you need to save space.
2700 2696
2701 CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR 2697 CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR
2702 Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in 2698 Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in
2703 SPL binary. 2699 SPL binary.
2704 2700
2705 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT, 2701 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT,
2706 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE, 2702 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE,
2707 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS, 2703 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS,
2708 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE, 2704 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE,
2709 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES 2705 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES
2710 Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses 2706 Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses
2711 to read U-Boot 2707 to read U-Boot
2712 2708
2713 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BOOT 2709 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BOOT
2714 Add support NAND boot 2710 Add support NAND boot
2715 2711
2716 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS 2712 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS
2717 Location in NAND to read U-Boot from 2713 Location in NAND to read U-Boot from
2718 2714
2719 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST 2715 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST
2720 Location in memory to load U-Boot to 2716 Location in memory to load U-Boot to
2721 2717
2722 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE 2718 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE
2723 Size of image to load 2719 Size of image to load
2724 2720
2725 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START 2721 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START
2726 Entry point in loaded image to jump to 2722 Entry point in loaded image to jump to
2727 2723
2728 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST 2724 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST
2729 Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the 2725 Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the
2730 data. This is used, for example, on davinci platforms. 2726 data. This is used, for example, on davinci platforms.
2731 2727
2732 CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE 2728 CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE
2733 Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary 2729 Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary
2734 2730
2735 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO 2731 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO
2736 Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending 2732 Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending
2737 the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as 2733 the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as
2738 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined. 2734 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
2739 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL 2735 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
2740 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE. 2736 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
2741 2737
2742 CONFIG_SPL_TARGET 2738 CONFIG_SPL_TARGET
2743 Final target image containing SPL and payload. Some SPLs 2739 Final target image containing SPL and payload. Some SPLs
2744 use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for 2740 use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for
2745 example if more than one image needs to be produced. 2741 example if more than one image needs to be produced.
2746 2742
2747 CONFIG_FIT_SPL_PRINT 2743 CONFIG_FIT_SPL_PRINT
2748 Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of 2744 Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of
2749 code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this 2745 code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this
2750 option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the 2746 option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the
2751 bootm command when booting a FIT image. 2747 bootm command when booting a FIT image.
2752 2748
2753 - TPL framework 2749 - TPL framework
2754 CONFIG_TPL 2750 CONFIG_TPL
2755 Enable building of TPL globally. 2751 Enable building of TPL globally.
2756 2752
2757 CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO 2753 CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO
2758 Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending 2754 Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending
2759 the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as 2755 the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as
2760 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined. 2756 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
2761 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL 2757 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
2762 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE. 2758 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
2763 2759
2764 - Interrupt support (PPC): 2760 - Interrupt support (PPC):
2765 2761
2766 There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt() 2762 There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt()
2767 for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu() 2763 for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu()
2768 for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu() 2764 for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu()
2769 should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If 2765 should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If
2770 CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt 2766 CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt
2771 (ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero. 2767 (ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero.
2772 timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU 2768 timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU
2773 specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led 2769 specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led
2774 / other_activity_monitor it works automatically from 2770 / other_activity_monitor it works automatically from
2775 general timer_interrupt(). 2771 general timer_interrupt().
2776 2772
2777 2773
2778 Board initialization settings: 2774 Board initialization settings:
2779 ------------------------------ 2775 ------------------------------
2780 2776
2781 During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions 2777 During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions
2782 to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup 2778 to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup
2783 before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the 2779 before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the
2784 following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is 2780 following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is
2785 architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c 2781 architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c
2786 typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r(). 2782 typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r().
2787 2783
2788 - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f() 2784 - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f()
2789 - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r() 2785 - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r()
2790 - CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init() 2786 - CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init()
2791 - CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init() 2787 - CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init()
2792 2788
2793 Configuration Settings: 2789 Configuration Settings:
2794 ----------------------- 2790 -----------------------
2795 2791
2796 - CONFIG_SYS_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit. 2792 - CONFIG_SYS_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit.
2797 Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands. 2793 Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands.
2798 2794
2799 - CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included; 2795 - CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included;
2800 undefine this when you're short of memory. 2796 undefine this when you're short of memory.
2801 2797
2802 - CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default 2798 - CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default
2803 width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output. 2799 width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output.
2804 2800
2805 - CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT: This is what U-Boot prints on the console to 2801 - CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT: This is what U-Boot prints on the console to
2806 prompt for user input. 2802 prompt for user input.
2807 2803
2808 - CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE: Buffer size for input from the Console 2804 - CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE: Buffer size for input from the Console
2809 2805
2810 - CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE: Buffer size for Console output 2806 - CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE: Buffer size for Console output
2811 2807
2812 - CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS: max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands 2808 - CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS: max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands
2813 2809
2814 - CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to 2810 - CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to
2815 the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is 2811 the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is
2816 booted 2812 booted
2817 2813
2818 - CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE: 2814 - CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE:
2819 List of legal baudrate settings for this board. 2815 List of legal baudrate settings for this board.
2820 2816
2821 - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START, CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END: 2817 - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START, CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END:
2822 Begin and End addresses of the area used by the 2818 Begin and End addresses of the area used by the
2823 simple memory test. 2819 simple memory test.
2824 2820
2825 - CONFIG_SYS_ALT_MEMTEST: 2821 - CONFIG_SYS_ALT_MEMTEST:
2826 Enable an alternate, more extensive memory test. 2822 Enable an alternate, more extensive memory test.
2827 2823
2828 - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_SCRATCH: 2824 - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_SCRATCH:
2829 Scratch address used by the alternate memory test 2825 Scratch address used by the alternate memory test
2830 You only need to set this if address zero isn't writeable 2826 You only need to set this if address zero isn't writeable
2831 2827
2832 - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE 2828 - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE
2833 Only implemented for ARMv8 for now. 2829 Only implemented for ARMv8 for now.
2834 If defined, the size of CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE memory 2830 If defined, the size of CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE memory
2835 is substracted from total RAM and won't be reported to OS. 2831 is substracted from total RAM and won't be reported to OS.
2836 This memory can be used as secure memory. A variable 2832 This memory can be used as secure memory. A variable
2837 gd->arch.secure_ram is used to track the location. In systems 2833 gd->arch.secure_ram is used to track the location. In systems
2838 the RAM base is not zero, or RAM is divided into banks, 2834 the RAM base is not zero, or RAM is divided into banks,
2839 this variable needs to be recalcuated to get the address. 2835 this variable needs to be recalcuated to get the address.
2840 2836
2841 - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE: 2837 - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE:
2842 If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, 2838 If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header,
2843 this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top 2839 this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top
2844 (end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By 2840 (end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By
2845 fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed 2841 fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed
2846 the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either. 2842 the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either.
2847 This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux 2843 This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux
2848 board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that 2844 board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that
2849 recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup 2845 recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup
2850 will have to get fixed in Linux additionally. 2846 will have to get fixed in Linux additionally.
2851 2847
2852 This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx 2848 This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx
2853 CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't 2849 CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't
2854 be touched. 2850 be touched.
2855 2851
2856 WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of 2852 WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of
2857 the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case, 2853 the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case,
2858 then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a 2854 then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a
2859 non page size aligned address and this could cause major 2855 non page size aligned address and this could cause major
2860 problems. 2856 problems.
2861 2857
2862 - CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE: 2858 - CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE:
2863 Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download 2859 Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download
2864 2860
2865 - CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE: 2861 - CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE:
2866 Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here. 2862 Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here.
2867 2863
2868 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE: 2864 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE:
2869 Physical start address of Flash memory. 2865 Physical start address of Flash memory.
2870 2866
2871 - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE: 2867 - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE:
2872 Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by 2868 Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by
2873 make config files to be same as the text base address 2869 make config files to be same as the text base address
2874 (CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as 2870 (CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as
2875 CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash. 2871 CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash.
2876 2872
2877 - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN: 2873 - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN:
2878 Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to 2874 Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to
2879 determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is 2875 determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is
2880 embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate 2876 embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate
2881 flash sector. 2877 flash sector.
2882 2878
2883 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN: 2879 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN:
2884 Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use. 2880 Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use.
2885 2881
2886 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN 2882 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN
2887 Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If 2883 Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If
2888 this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation 2884 this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation
2889 will become available before relocation. The address is just 2885 will become available before relocation. The address is just
2890 below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make 2886 below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make
2891 space. 2887 space.
2892 2888
2893 This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses 2889 This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses
2894 within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc() 2890 within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc()
2895 is not available. free() is supported but does nothing. 2891 is not available. free() is supported but does nothing.
2896 The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotten) when 2892 The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotten) when
2897 U-Boot relocates itself. 2893 U-Boot relocates itself.
2898 2894
2899 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_SIMPLE 2895 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_SIMPLE
2900 Provides a simple and small malloc() and calloc() for those 2896 Provides a simple and small malloc() and calloc() for those
2901 boards which do not use the full malloc in SPL (which is 2897 boards which do not use the full malloc in SPL (which is
2902 enabled with CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START). 2898 enabled with CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START).
2903 2899
2904 - CONFIG_SYS_NONCACHED_MEMORY: 2900 - CONFIG_SYS_NONCACHED_MEMORY:
2905 Size of non-cached memory area. This area of memory will be 2901 Size of non-cached memory area. This area of memory will be
2906 typically located right below the malloc() area and mapped 2902 typically located right below the malloc() area and mapped
2907 uncached in the MMU. This is useful for drivers that would 2903 uncached in the MMU. This is useful for drivers that would
2908 otherwise require a lot of explicit cache maintenance. For 2904 otherwise require a lot of explicit cache maintenance. For
2909 some drivers it's also impossible to properly maintain the 2905 some drivers it's also impossible to properly maintain the
2910 cache. For example if the regions that need to be flushed 2906 cache. For example if the regions that need to be flushed
2911 are not a multiple of the cache-line size, *and* padding 2907 are not a multiple of the cache-line size, *and* padding
2912 cannot be allocated between the regions to align them (i.e. 2908 cannot be allocated between the regions to align them (i.e.
2913 if the HW requires a contiguous array of regions, and the 2909 if the HW requires a contiguous array of regions, and the
2914 size of each region is not cache-aligned), then a flush of 2910 size of each region is not cache-aligned), then a flush of
2915 one region may result in overwriting data that hardware has 2911 one region may result in overwriting data that hardware has
2916 written to another region in the same cache-line. This can 2912 written to another region in the same cache-line. This can
2917 happen for example in network drivers where descriptors for 2913 happen for example in network drivers where descriptors for
2918 buffers are typically smaller than the CPU cache-line (e.g. 2914 buffers are typically smaller than the CPU cache-line (e.g.
2919 16 bytes vs. 32 or 64 bytes). 2915 16 bytes vs. 32 or 64 bytes).
2920 2916
2921 Non-cached memory is only supported on 32-bit ARM at present. 2917 Non-cached memory is only supported on 32-bit ARM at present.
2922 2918
2923 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN: 2919 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN:
2924 Normally compressed uImages are limited to an 2920 Normally compressed uImages are limited to an
2925 uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough, 2921 uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough,
2926 you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file 2922 you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file
2927 to adjust this setting to your needs. 2923 to adjust this setting to your needs.
2928 2924
2929 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ: 2925 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ:
2930 Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of 2926 Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of
2931 the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by 2927 the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by
2932 the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if 2928 the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if
2933 used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low" 2929 used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low"
2934 environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case 2930 environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case
2935 all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low" 2931 all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low"
2936 and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. The environment 2932 and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. The environment
2937 variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of 2933 variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of
2938 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined, 2934 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined,
2939 then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead. 2935 then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead.
2940 2936
2941 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH: 2937 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH:
2942 Enable initrd_high functionality. If defined then the 2938 Enable initrd_high functionality. If defined then the
2943 initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand 2939 initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand
2944 is enabled. 2940 is enabled.
2945 2941
2946 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE: 2942 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE:
2947 Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between 2943 Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between
2948 "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ. 2944 "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
2949 2945
2950 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD: 2946 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD:
2951 Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in 2947 Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in
2952 space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ. 2948 space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
2953 2949
2954 - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS: 2950 - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS:
2955 Max number of Flash memory banks 2951 Max number of Flash memory banks
2956 2952
2957 - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT: 2953 - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT:
2958 Max number of sectors on a Flash chip 2954 Max number of sectors on a Flash chip
2959 2955
2960 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT: 2956 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT:
2961 Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms) 2957 Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms)
2962 2958
2963 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT: 2959 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT:
2964 Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms) 2960 Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms)
2965 2961
2966 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT 2962 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT
2967 Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms) 2963 Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms)
2968 2964
2969 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT 2965 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT
2970 Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms) 2966 Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms)
2971 2967
2972 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION 2968 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION
2973 If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used 2969 If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used
2974 instead of U-Boot software protection. 2970 instead of U-Boot software protection.
2975 2971
2976 - CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP: 2972 - CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP:
2977 2973
2978 Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory; 2974 Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory;
2979 without this option such a download has to be 2975 without this option such a download has to be
2980 performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2) 2976 performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2)
2981 copy from RAM to flash. 2977 copy from RAM to flash.
2982 2978
2983 The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since 2979 The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since
2984 you can check if the download worked before you erase 2980 you can check if the download worked before you erase
2985 the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is 2981 the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is
2986 too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the 2982 too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the
2987 downloaded image) this option may be very useful. 2983 downloaded image) this option may be very useful.
2988 2984
2989 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI: 2985 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI:
2990 Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the 2986 Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the
2991 common flash structure for storing flash geometry. 2987 common flash structure for storing flash geometry.
2992 2988
2993 - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER 2989 - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER
2994 This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver 2990 This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver
2995 in the drivers directory 2991 in the drivers directory
2996 2992
2997 - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD 2993 - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD
2998 This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver 2994 This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver
2999 in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash 2995 in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash
3000 to the MTD layer. 2996 to the MTD layer.
3001 2997
3002 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE 2998 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE
3003 Use buffered writes to flash. 2999 Use buffered writes to flash.
3004 3000
3005 - CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N 3001 - CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N
3006 s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered 3002 s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered
3007 write commands. 3003 write commands.
3008 3004
3009 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST 3005 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST
3010 If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't 3006 If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't
3011 print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This 3007 print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This
3012 is useful, if some of the configured banks are only 3008 is useful, if some of the configured banks are only
3013 optionally available. 3009 optionally available.
3014 3010
3015 - CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS 3011 - CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS
3016 If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown 3012 If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown
3017 digits and dots. Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80 3013 digits and dots. Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80
3018 column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays. 3014 column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays.
3019 3015
3020 - CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY 3016 - CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY
3021 If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared 3017 If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared
3022 against the source after the write operation. An error message 3018 against the source after the write operation. An error message
3023 will be printed when the contents are not identical. 3019 will be printed when the contents are not identical.
3024 Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases, 3020 Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases,
3025 since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier 3021 since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier
3026 while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable 3022 while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable
3027 this option if you really know what you are doing. 3023 this option if you really know what you are doing.
3028 3024
3029 - CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER: 3025 - CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER:
3030 Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some 3026 Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some
3031 Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value 3027 Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value
3032 to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all 3028 to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all
3033 buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface 3029 buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface
3034 on high Ethernet traffic. 3030 on high Ethernet traffic.
3035 Defaults to 4 if not defined. 3031 Defaults to 4 if not defined.
3036 3032
3037 - CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES 3033 - CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES
3038 3034
3039 Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used 3035 Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used
3040 internally to store the environment settings. The default 3036 internally to store the environment settings. The default
3041 setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most 3037 setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most
3042 cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see 3038 cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see
3043 lib/hashtable.c for details. 3039 lib/hashtable.c for details.
3044 3040
3045 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT 3041 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
3046 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC 3042 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
3047 Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when 3043 Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when
3048 calling env set. Variables can be restricted to only decimal, 3044 calling env set. Variables can be restricted to only decimal,
3049 hexadecimal, or boolean. If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined, 3045 hexadecimal, or boolean. If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined,
3050 the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address. 3046 the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address.
3051 3047
3052 The format of the list is: 3048 The format of the list is:
3053 type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m] 3049 type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m]
3054 access_attribute = [a|r|o|c] 3050 access_attribute = [a|r|o|c]
3055 attributes = type_attribute[access_attribute] 3051 attributes = type_attribute[access_attribute]
3056 entry = variable_name[:attributes] 3052 entry = variable_name[:attributes]
3057 list = entry[,list] 3053 list = entry[,list]
3058 3054
3059 The type attributes are: 3055 The type attributes are:
3060 s - String (default) 3056 s - String (default)
3061 d - Decimal 3057 d - Decimal
3062 x - Hexadecimal 3058 x - Hexadecimal
3063 b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF]) 3059 b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF])
3064 i - IP address 3060 i - IP address
3065 m - MAC address 3061 m - MAC address
3066 3062
3067 The access attributes are: 3063 The access attributes are:
3068 a - Any (default) 3064 a - Any (default)
3069 r - Read-only 3065 r - Read-only
3070 o - Write-once 3066 o - Write-once
3071 c - Change-default 3067 c - Change-default
3072 3068
3073 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT 3069 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
3074 Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags" 3070 Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags"
3075 environment variable in the default or embedded environment. 3071 environment variable in the default or embedded environment.
3076 3072
3077 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC 3073 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
3078 Define this to a list (string) to define validation that 3074 Define this to a list (string) to define validation that
3079 should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags" 3075 should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags"
3080 environment variable. To override a setting in the static 3076 environment variable. To override a setting in the static
3081 list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the 3077 list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the
3082 ".flags" variable. 3078 ".flags" variable.
3083 3079
3084 If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a 3080 If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a
3085 regular expression. This allows multiple variables to define the same 3081 regular expression. This allows multiple variables to define the same
3086 flags without explicitly listing them for each variable. 3082 flags without explicitly listing them for each variable.
3087 3083
3088 - CONFIG_ENV_ACCESS_IGNORE_FORCE 3084 - CONFIG_ENV_ACCESS_IGNORE_FORCE
3089 If defined, don't allow the -f switch to env set override variable 3085 If defined, don't allow the -f switch to env set override variable
3090 access flags. 3086 access flags.
3091 3087
3092 - CONFIG_USE_STDINT 3088 - CONFIG_USE_STDINT
3093 If stdint.h is available with your toolchain you can define this 3089 If stdint.h is available with your toolchain you can define this
3094 option to enable it. You can provide option 'USE_STDINT=1' when 3090 option to enable it. You can provide option 'USE_STDINT=1' when
3095 building U-Boot to enable this. 3091 building U-Boot to enable this.
3096 3092
3097 The following definitions that deal with the placement and management 3093 The following definitions that deal with the placement and management
3098 of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the 3094 of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the
3099 following configurations: 3095 following configurations:
3100 3096
3101 - CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC: 3097 - CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC:
3102 3098
3103 Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils 3099 Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils
3104 may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images. 3100 may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images.
3105 3101
3106 BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early 3102 BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early
3107 in U-Boot initialization (when we try to get the setting of for the 3103 in U-Boot initialization (when we try to get the setting of for the
3108 console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or 3104 console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or
3109 U-Boot will hang. 3105 U-Boot will hang.
3110 3106
3111 Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the 3107 Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the
3112 environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to 3108 environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to
3113 keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv" 3109 keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv"
3114 to save the current settings. 3110 to save the current settings.
3115 3111
3116 BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use 3112 BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use
3117 "saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the 3113 "saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the
3118 environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link, 3114 environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link,
3119 but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface. 3115 but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface.
3120 3116
3121 - CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST 3117 - CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST
3122 3118
3123 Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the 3119 Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the
3124 environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to 3120 environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to
3125 CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE. 3121 CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE.
3126 3122
3127 Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor 3123 Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor
3128 has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been 3124 has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been
3129 created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use env_get_f() 3125 created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use env_get_f()
3130 until then to read environment variables. 3126 until then to read environment variables.
3131 3127
3132 The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor 3128 The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor
3133 is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working 3129 is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working
3134 with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is 3130 with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is
3135 necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the 3131 necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the
3136 "baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't 3132 "baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't
3137 have any device yet where we could complain.] 3133 have any device yet where we could complain.]
3138 3134
3139 Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if 3135 Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if
3140 the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you 3136 the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you
3141 use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment. 3137 use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment.
3142 3138
3143 - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN: 3139 - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN:
3144 Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED. 3140 Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED.
3145 3141
3146 Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR 3142 Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR
3147 also needs to be defined. 3143 also needs to be defined.
3148 3144
3149 - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR: 3145 - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR:
3150 MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state. 3146 MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state.
3151 3147
3152 - CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS: 3148 - CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS:
3153 Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init 3149 Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init
3154 and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at 3150 and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at
3155 drivers/serial/ns16550.c. This option is useful for saving 3151 drivers/serial/ns16550.c. This option is useful for saving
3156 space for already greatly restricted images, including but not 3152 space for already greatly restricted images, including but not
3157 limited to NAND_SPL configurations. 3153 limited to NAND_SPL configurations.
3158 3154
3159 - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO 3155 - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO
3160 Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on 3156 Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on
3161 when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called 3157 when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called
3162 to do this. 3158 to do this.
3163 3159
3164 - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE 3160 - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE
3165 Similar to the previous option, but display this information 3161 Similar to the previous option, but display this information
3166 later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if 3162 later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if
3167 present. 3163 present.
3168 3164
3169 - CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT: 3165 - CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT:
3170 Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the 3166 Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the
3171 build system checks that the actual size does not 3167 build system checks that the actual size does not
3172 exceed it. 3168 exceed it.
3173 3169
3174 Low Level (hardware related) configuration options: 3170 Low Level (hardware related) configuration options:
3175 --------------------------------------------------- 3171 ---------------------------------------------------
3176 3172
3177 - CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE: 3173 - CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE:
3178 Cache Line Size of the CPU. 3174 Cache Line Size of the CPU.
3179 3175
3180 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT: 3176 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT:
3181 Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale 3177 Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale
3182 PowerPC SOCs. 3178 PowerPC SOCs.
3183 3179
3184 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR: 3180 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR:
3185 Virtual address of CCSR. On a 32-bit build, this is typically 3181 Virtual address of CCSR. On a 32-bit build, this is typically
3186 the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. 3182 the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT.
3187 3183
3188 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS: 3184 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS:
3189 Physical address of CCSR. CCSR can be relocated to a new 3185 Physical address of CCSR. CCSR can be relocated to a new
3190 physical address, if desired. In this case, this macro should 3186 physical address, if desired. In this case, this macro should
3191 be set to that address. Otherwise, it should be set to the 3187 be set to that address. Otherwise, it should be set to the
3192 same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. For example, CCSR 3188 same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. For example, CCSR
3193 is typically relocated on 36-bit builds. It is recommended 3189 is typically relocated on 36-bit builds. It is recommended
3194 that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros: 3190 that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros:
3195 3191
3196 #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH 3192 #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH
3197 * 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW) 3193 * 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW)
3198 3194
3199 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH: 3195 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH:
3200 Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This value is typically 3196 Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This value is typically
3201 either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build). This macro is 3197 either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build). This macro is
3202 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or 3198 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
3203 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL"). 3199 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
3204 3200
3205 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW: 3201 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW:
3206 Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This macro is 3202 Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This macro is
3207 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or 3203 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
3208 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL"). 3204 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
3209 3205
3210 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE: 3206 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE:
3211 If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be 3207 If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be
3212 forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated. 3208 forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated.
3213 3209
3214 - Floppy Disk Support: 3210 - Floppy Disk Support:
3215 CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER 3211 CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER
3216 3212
3217 the default drive number (default value 0) 3213 the default drive number (default value 0)
3218 3214
3219 CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE 3215 CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE
3220 3216
3221 defines the spacing between FDC chipset registers 3217 defines the spacing between FDC chipset registers
3222 (default value 1) 3218 (default value 1)
3223 3219
3224 CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET 3220 CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET
3225 3221
3226 defines the offset of register from address. It 3222 defines the offset of register from address. It
3227 depends on which part of the data bus is connected to 3223 depends on which part of the data bus is connected to
3228 the FDC chipset. (default value 0) 3224 the FDC chipset. (default value 0)
3229 3225
3230 If CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET and 3226 If CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET and
3231 CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER are undefined, they take their 3227 CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER are undefined, they take their
3232 default value. 3228 default value.
3233 3229
3234 if CONFIG_SYS_FDC_HW_INIT is defined, then the function 3230 if CONFIG_SYS_FDC_HW_INIT is defined, then the function
3235 fdc_hw_init() is called at the beginning of the FDC 3231 fdc_hw_init() is called at the beginning of the FDC
3236 setup. fdc_hw_init() must be provided by the board 3232 setup. fdc_hw_init() must be provided by the board
3237 source code. It is used to make hardware-dependent 3233 source code. It is used to make hardware-dependent
3238 initializations. 3234 initializations.
3239 3235
3240 - CONFIG_IDE_AHB: 3236 - CONFIG_IDE_AHB:
3241 Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI 3237 Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI
3242 interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface. 3238 interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface.
3243 When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to 3239 When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to
3244 IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional 3240 IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional
3245 registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller 3241 registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller
3246 is required. 3242 is required.
3247 3243
3248 - CONFIG_SYS_IMMR: Physical address of the Internal Memory. 3244 - CONFIG_SYS_IMMR: Physical address of the Internal Memory.
3249 DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're 3245 DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're
3250 doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx systems only] 3246 doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx systems only]
3251 3247
3252 - CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR: 3248 - CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR:
3253 3249
3254 Start address of memory area that can be used for 3250 Start address of memory area that can be used for
3255 initial data and stack; please note that this must be 3251 initial data and stack; please note that this must be
3256 writable memory that is working WITHOUT special 3252 writable memory that is working WITHOUT special
3257 initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which 3253 initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which
3258 will become available only after programming the 3254 will become available only after programming the
3259 memory controller and running certain initialization 3255 memory controller and running certain initialization
3260 sequences. 3256 sequences.
3261 3257
3262 U-Boot uses the following memory types: 3258 U-Boot uses the following memory types:
3263 - MPC8xx: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU) 3259 - MPC8xx: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU)
3264 3260
3265 - CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET: 3261 - CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET:
3266 3262
3267 Offset of the initial data structure in the memory 3263 Offset of the initial data structure in the memory
3268 area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually 3264 area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually
3269 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial 3265 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial
3270 data is located at the end of the available space 3266 data is located at the end of the available space
3271 (sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE - 3267 (sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE -
3272 GENERATED_GBL_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just 3268 GENERATED_GBL_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just
3273 below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR + 3269 below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR +
3274 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward. 3270 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward.
3275 3271
3276 Note: 3272 Note:
3277 On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data 3273 On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data
3278 cache for initial memory) the address chosen for 3274 cache for initial memory) the address chosen for
3279 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must 3275 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must
3280 point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between 3276 point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between
3281 the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space. 3277 the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space.
3282 3278
3283 - CONFIG_SYS_SCCR: System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27) 3279 - CONFIG_SYS_SCCR: System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27)
3284 3280
3285 - CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM: 3281 - CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM:
3286 SDRAM timing 3282 SDRAM timing
3287 3283
3288 - CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA: 3284 - CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA:
3289 periodic timer for refresh 3285 periodic timer for refresh
3290 3286
3291 - FLASH_BASE0_PRELIM, FLASH_BASE1_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_REMAP_OR_AM, 3287 - FLASH_BASE0_PRELIM, FLASH_BASE1_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_REMAP_OR_AM,
3292 CONFIG_SYS_PRELIM_OR_AM, CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_FLASH, CONFIG_SYS_OR0_REMAP, 3288 CONFIG_SYS_PRELIM_OR_AM, CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_FLASH, CONFIG_SYS_OR0_REMAP,
3293 CONFIG_SYS_OR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_REMAP, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_PRELIM, 3289 CONFIG_SYS_OR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_REMAP, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_PRELIM,
3294 CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM: 3290 CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM:
3295 Memory Controller Definitions: BR0/1 and OR0/1 (FLASH) 3291 Memory Controller Definitions: BR0/1 and OR0/1 (FLASH)
3296 3292
3297 - SDRAM_BASE2_PRELIM, SDRAM_BASE3_PRELIM, SDRAM_MAX_SIZE, 3293 - SDRAM_BASE2_PRELIM, SDRAM_BASE3_PRELIM, SDRAM_MAX_SIZE,
3298 CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM, CONFIG_SYS_OR2_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR2_PRELIM, 3294 CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM, CONFIG_SYS_OR2_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR2_PRELIM,
3299 CONFIG_SYS_OR3_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR3_PRELIM: 3295 CONFIG_SYS_OR3_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR3_PRELIM:
3300 Memory Controller Definitions: BR2/3 and OR2/3 (SDRAM) 3296 Memory Controller Definitions: BR2/3 and OR2/3 (SDRAM)
3301 3297
3302 - CONFIG_PCI_ENUM_ONLY 3298 - CONFIG_PCI_ENUM_ONLY
3303 Only scan through and get the devices on the buses. 3299 Only scan through and get the devices on the buses.
3304 Don't do any setup work, presumably because someone or 3300 Don't do any setup work, presumably because someone or
3305 something has already done it, and we don't need to do it 3301 something has already done it, and we don't need to do it
3306 a second time. Useful for platforms that are pre-booted 3302 a second time. Useful for platforms that are pre-booted
3307 by coreboot or similar. 3303 by coreboot or similar.
3308 3304
3309 - CONFIG_PCI_INDIRECT_BRIDGE: 3305 - CONFIG_PCI_INDIRECT_BRIDGE:
3310 Enable support for indirect PCI bridges. 3306 Enable support for indirect PCI bridges.
3311 3307
3312 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIO: 3308 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIO:
3313 Chip has SRIO or not 3309 Chip has SRIO or not
3314 3310
3315 - CONFIG_SRIO1: 3311 - CONFIG_SRIO1:
3316 Board has SRIO 1 port available 3312 Board has SRIO 1 port available
3317 3313
3318 - CONFIG_SRIO2: 3314 - CONFIG_SRIO2:
3319 Board has SRIO 2 port available 3315 Board has SRIO 2 port available
3320 3316
3321 - CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER 3317 - CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER
3322 Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE 3318 Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE
3323 3319
3324 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT: 3320 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT:
3325 Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region 3321 Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
3326 3322
3327 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYS: 3323 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYS:
3328 Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region 3324 Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
3329 3325
3330 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE: 3326 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE:
3331 Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region 3327 Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region
3332 3328
3333 - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT 3329 - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT
3334 Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using 3330 Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using
3335 a 16 bit bus. 3331 a 16 bit bus.
3336 Not all NAND drivers use this symbol. 3332 Not all NAND drivers use this symbol.
3337 Example of drivers that use it: 3333 Example of drivers that use it:
3338 - drivers/mtd/nand/ndfc.c 3334 - drivers/mtd/nand/ndfc.c
3339 - drivers/mtd/nand/mxc_nand.c 3335 - drivers/mtd/nand/mxc_nand.c
3340 3336
3341 - CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG 3337 - CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG
3342 Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined 3338 Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined
3343 a default value will be used. 3339 a default value will be used.
3344 3340
3345 - CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM 3341 - CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM
3346 Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common 3342 Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common
3347 with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs 3343 with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs
3348 3344
3349 SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS 3345 SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS
3350 I2C address of the SPD EEPROM 3346 I2C address of the SPD EEPROM
3351 3347
3352 - CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM 3348 - CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
3353 If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first 3349 If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first
3354 one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve 3350 one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve
3355 to something your driver can deal with. 3351 to something your driver can deal with.
3356 3352
3357 - CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING 3353 - CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING
3358 Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with 3354 Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with
3359 soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing 3355 soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing
3360 parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into 3356 parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into
3361 header files or board specific files. 3357 header files or board specific files.
3362 3358
3363 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE 3359 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE
3364 Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr. 3360 Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr.
3365 3361
3366 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_SYNC_REFRESH 3362 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_SYNC_REFRESH
3367 Enable sync of refresh for multiple controllers. 3363 Enable sync of refresh for multiple controllers.
3368 3364
3369 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_BIST 3365 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_BIST
3370 Enable built-in memory test for Freescale DDR controllers. 3366 Enable built-in memory test for Freescale DDR controllers.
3371 3367
3372 - CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0 3368 - CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0
3373 Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should 3369 Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should
3374 be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3. 3370 be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3.
3375 3371
3376 - CONFIG_RMII 3372 - CONFIG_RMII
3377 Enable RMII mode for all FECs. 3373 Enable RMII mode for all FECs.
3378 Note that this is a global option, we can't 3374 Note that this is a global option, we can't
3379 have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode. 3375 have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode.
3380 3376
3381 - CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY 3377 - CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY
3382 Add a verify option to the crc32 command. 3378 Add a verify option to the crc32 command.
3383 The syntax is: 3379 The syntax is:
3384 3380
3385 => crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32> 3381 => crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32>
3386 3382
3387 Where address/count indicate a memory area 3383 Where address/count indicate a memory area
3388 and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the 3384 and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the
3389 area should have. 3385 area should have.
3390 3386
3391 - CONFIG_LOOPW 3387 - CONFIG_LOOPW
3392 Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if 3388 Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if
3393 the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY). 3389 the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY).
3394 3390
3395 - CONFIG_MX_CYCLIC 3391 - CONFIG_MX_CYCLIC
3396 Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic 3392 Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic
3397 "md/mw" commands. 3393 "md/mw" commands.
3398 Examples: 3394 Examples:
3399 3395
3400 => mdc.b 10 4 500 3396 => mdc.b 10 4 500
3401 This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms. 3397 This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms.
3402 3398
3403 => mwc.l 100 12345678 10 3399 => mwc.l 100 12345678 10
3404 This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms. 3400 This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms.
3405 3401
3406 This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated 3402 This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated
3407 globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY). 3403 globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY).
3408 3404
3409 - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT 3405 - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT
3410 [ARM, NDS32, MIPS, RISC-V only] If this variable is defined, then certain 3406 [ARM, NDS32, MIPS, RISC-V only] If this variable is defined, then certain
3411 low level initializations (like setting up the memory 3407 low level initializations (like setting up the memory
3412 controller) are omitted and/or U-Boot does not 3408 controller) are omitted and/or U-Boot does not
3413 relocate itself into RAM. 3409 relocate itself into RAM.
3414 3410
3415 Normally this variable MUST NOT be defined. The only 3411 Normally this variable MUST NOT be defined. The only
3416 exception is when U-Boot is loaded (to RAM) by some 3412 exception is when U-Boot is loaded (to RAM) by some
3417 other boot loader or by a debugger which performs 3413 other boot loader or by a debugger which performs
3418 these initializations itself. 3414 these initializations itself.
3419 3415
3420 - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT_ONLY 3416 - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT_ONLY
3421 [ARM926EJ-S only] This allows just the call to lowlevel_init() 3417 [ARM926EJ-S only] This allows just the call to lowlevel_init()
3422 to be skipped. The normal CP15 init (such as enabling the 3418 to be skipped. The normal CP15 init (such as enabling the
3423 instruction cache) is still performed. 3419 instruction cache) is still performed.
3424 3420
3425 - CONFIG_SPL_BUILD 3421 - CONFIG_SPL_BUILD
3426 Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader 3422 Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader
3427 that is executed before the actual U-Boot. E.g. when 3423 that is executed before the actual U-Boot. E.g. when
3428 compiling a NAND SPL. 3424 compiling a NAND SPL.
3429 3425
3430 - CONFIG_TPL_BUILD 3426 - CONFIG_TPL_BUILD
3431 Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader 3427 Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader
3432 that is executed after the SPL and before the actual U-Boot. 3428 that is executed after the SPL and before the actual U-Boot.
3433 It is loaded by the SPL. 3429 It is loaded by the SPL.
3434 3430
3435 - CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC 3431 - CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC
3436 Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section 3432 Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section
3437 .resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the 3433 .resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the
3438 previous 4k of the .text section. 3434 previous 4k of the .text section.
3439 3435
3440 - CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM 3436 - CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM
3441 Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses 3437 Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses
3442 effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard 3438 effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard
3443 U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated 3439 U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated
3444 to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since 3440 to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since
3445 it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all 3441 it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all
3446 addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses 3442 addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses
3447 to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem(). 3443 to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem().
3448 3444
3449 - CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR 3445 - CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR
3450 If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not 3446 If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not
3451 needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot. 3447 needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot.
3452 3448
3453 - CONFIG_SPL_AM33XX_ENABLE_RTC32K_OSC: 3449 - CONFIG_SPL_AM33XX_ENABLE_RTC32K_OSC:
3454 Enables the RTC32K OSC on AM33xx based plattforms 3450 Enables the RTC32K OSC on AM33xx based plattforms
3455 3451
3456 - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE 3452 - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE
3457 Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver 3453 Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver
3458 driver that uses this: 3454 driver that uses this:
3459 drivers/mtd/nand/davinci_nand.c 3455 drivers/mtd/nand/davinci_nand.c
3460 3456
3461 Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support: 3457 Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support:
3462 ----------------------------------- 3458 -----------------------------------
3463 3459
3464 The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the 3460 The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the
3465 loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format. 3461 loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format.
3466 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros 3462 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
3467 are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address 3463 are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
3468 within that device. 3464 within that device.
3469 3465
3470 - CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR 3466 - CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR
3471 The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located. The 3467 The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located. The
3472 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro 3468 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro
3473 is also specified. 3469 is also specified.
3474 3470
3475 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR 3471 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR
3476 The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located. The 3472 The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located. The
3477 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro 3473 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro
3478 is also specified. 3474 is also specified.
3479 3475
3480 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH 3476 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH
3481 The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format 3477 The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format
3482 has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it 3478 has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it
3483 might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some 3479 might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some
3484 local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first. 3480 local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first.
3485 3481
3486 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR 3482 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR
3487 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as 3483 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as
3488 normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the 3484 normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the
3489 virtual address in NOR flash. 3485 virtual address in NOR flash.
3490 3486
3491 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND 3487 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND
3492 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash. 3488 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash.
3493 CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash. 3489 CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash.
3494 3490
3495 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC 3491 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC
3496 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC 3492 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC
3497 device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device. 3493 device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device.
3498 3494
3499 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE 3495 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE
3500 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master) 3496 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master)
3501 memory space. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which 3497 memory space. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which
3502 can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound 3498 can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound
3503 window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in 3499 window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in
3504 master's memory space. 3500 master's memory space.
3505 3501
3506 Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support: 3502 Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support:
3507 --------------------------------------------------------- 3503 ---------------------------------------------------------
3508 The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of 3504 The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of
3509 "firmware". 3505 "firmware".
3510 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros 3506 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
3511 are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address 3507 are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
3512 within that device. 3508 within that device.
3513 3509
3514 - CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET 3510 - CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET
3515 Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs. 3511 Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs.
3516 3512
3517 Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support: 3513 Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support:
3518 ------------------------------------------- 3514 -------------------------------------------
3519 The Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support supports the loading of 3515 The Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support supports the loading of
3520 "Debug Server firmware" and triggering SP boot-rom. 3516 "Debug Server firmware" and triggering SP boot-rom.
3521 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting. 3517 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting.
3522 3518
3523 - CONFIG_SYS_MC_RSV_MEM_ALIGN 3519 - CONFIG_SYS_MC_RSV_MEM_ALIGN
3524 Define alignment of reserved memory MC requires 3520 Define alignment of reserved memory MC requires
3525 3521
3526 Reproducible builds 3522 Reproducible builds
3527 ------------------- 3523 -------------------
3528 3524
3529 In order to achieve reproducible builds, timestamps used in the U-Boot build 3525 In order to achieve reproducible builds, timestamps used in the U-Boot build
3530 process have to be set to a fixed value. 3526 process have to be set to a fixed value.
3531 3527
3532 This is done using the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment variable. 3528 This is done using the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment variable.
3533 SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH is to be set on the build host's shell, not as a configuration 3529 SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH is to be set on the build host's shell, not as a configuration
3534 option for U-Boot or an environment variable in U-Boot. 3530 option for U-Boot or an environment variable in U-Boot.
3535 3531
3536 SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should be set to a number of seconds since the epoch, in UTC. 3532 SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should be set to a number of seconds since the epoch, in UTC.
3537 3533
3538 Building the Software: 3534 Building the Software:
3539 ====================== 3535 ======================
3540 3536
3541 Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments 3537 Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments
3542 and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support 3538 and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support
3543 all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all 3539 all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all
3544 (potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we 3540 (potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we
3545 recommend to use the ELDK (see http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK) 3541 recommend to use the ELDK (see http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK)
3546 which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot. 3542 which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot.
3547 3543
3548 If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you 3544 If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you
3549 have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case, 3545 have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case,
3550 you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell. 3546 you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell.
3551 Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are 3547 Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are
3552 necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter: 3548 necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter:
3553 3549
3554 $ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx- 3550 $ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx-
3555 $ export CROSS_COMPILE 3551 $ export CROSS_COMPILE
3556 3552
3557 Note: If you wish to generate Windows versions of the utilities in 3553 Note: If you wish to generate Windows versions of the utilities in
3558 the tools directory you can use the MinGW toolchain 3554 the tools directory you can use the MinGW toolchain
3559 (http://www.mingw.org). Set your HOST tools to the MinGW 3555 (http://www.mingw.org). Set your HOST tools to the MinGW
3560 toolchain and execute 'make tools'. For example: 3556 toolchain and execute 'make tools'. For example:
3561 3557
3562 $ make HOSTCC=i586-mingw32msvc-gcc HOSTSTRIP=i586-mingw32msvc-strip tools 3558 $ make HOSTCC=i586-mingw32msvc-gcc HOSTSTRIP=i586-mingw32msvc-strip tools
3563 3559
3564 Binaries such as tools/mkimage.exe will be created which can 3560 Binaries such as tools/mkimage.exe will be created which can
3565 be executed on computers running Windows. 3561 be executed on computers running Windows.
3566 3562
3567 U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the 3563 U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the
3568 sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This 3564 sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This
3569 is done by typing: 3565 is done by typing:
3570 3566
3571 make NAME_defconfig 3567 make NAME_defconfig
3572 3568
3573 where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu- 3569 where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu-
3574 rations; see boards.cfg for supported names. 3570 rations; see boards.cfg for supported names.
3575 3571
3576 Note: for some board special configuration names may exist; check if 3572 Note: for some board special configuration names may exist; check if
3577 additional information is available from the board vendor; for 3573 additional information is available from the board vendor; for
3578 instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard) 3574 instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard)
3579 or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features" 3575 or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features"
3580 when choosing the configuration, i. e. 3576 when choosing the configuration, i. e.
3581 3577
3582 make TQM823L_defconfig 3578 make TQM823L_defconfig
3583 - will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support 3579 - will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support
3584 3580
3585 make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig 3581 make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig
3586 - will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD 3582 - will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD
3587 3583
3588 etc. 3584 etc.
3589 3585
3590 3586
3591 Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot 3587 Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot
3592 images ready for download to / installation on your system: 3588 images ready for download to / installation on your system:
3593 3589
3594 - "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image 3590 - "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image
3595 - "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format 3591 - "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format
3596 - "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format 3592 - "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format
3597 3593
3598 By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved 3594 By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved
3599 in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change 3595 in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change
3600 this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory: 3596 this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory:
3601 3597
3602 1. Add O= to the make command line invocations: 3598 1. Add O= to the make command line invocations:
3603 3599
3604 make O=/tmp/build distclean 3600 make O=/tmp/build distclean
3605 make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig 3601 make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig
3606 make O=/tmp/build all 3602 make O=/tmp/build all
3607 3603
3608 2. Set environment variable KBUILD_OUTPUT to point to the desired location: 3604 2. Set environment variable KBUILD_OUTPUT to point to the desired location:
3609 3605
3610 export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build 3606 export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build
3611 make distclean 3607 make distclean
3612 make NAME_defconfig 3608 make NAME_defconfig
3613 make all 3609 make all
3614 3610
3615 Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment 3611 Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment
3616 variable. 3612 variable.
3617 3613
3618 User specific CPPFLAGS, AFLAGS and CFLAGS can be passed to the compiler by 3614 User specific CPPFLAGS, AFLAGS and CFLAGS can be passed to the compiler by
3619 setting the according environment variables KCPPFLAGS, KAFLAGS and KCFLAGS. 3615 setting the according environment variables KCPPFLAGS, KAFLAGS and KCFLAGS.
3620 For example to treat all compiler warnings as errors: 3616 For example to treat all compiler warnings as errors:
3621 3617
3622 make KCFLAGS=-Werror 3618 make KCFLAGS=-Werror
3623 3619
3624 Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so 3620 Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so
3625 for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of 3621 for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of
3626 native "make". 3622 native "make".
3627 3623
3628 3624
3629 If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need 3625 If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need
3630 to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these 3626 to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these
3631 steps: 3627 steps:
3632 3628
3633 1. Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any 3629 1. Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any
3634 files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least 3630 files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least
3635 the "Makefile" and a "<board>.c". 3631 the "Makefile" and a "<board>.c".
3636 2. Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for 3632 2. Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for
3637 your board. 3633 your board.
3638 3. If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new 3634 3. If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new
3639 directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need. 3635 directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need.
3640 4. Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name. 3636 4. Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name.
3641 5. Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file 3637 5. Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file
3642 to be installed on your target system. 3638 to be installed on your target system.
3643 6. Debug and solve any problems that might arise. 3639 6. Debug and solve any problems that might arise.
3644 [Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.] 3640 [Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.]
3645 3641
3646 3642
3647 Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.: 3643 Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.:
3648 ============================================================== 3644 ==============================================================
3649 3645
3650 If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board 3646 If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board
3651 or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to 3647 or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to
3652 provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes 3648 provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes
3653 the form of a "patch", i. e. a context diff against a certain (latest 3649 the form of a "patch", i. e. a context diff against a certain (latest
3654 official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources. 3650 official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources.
3655 3651
3656 But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi- 3652 But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi-
3657 cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of 3653 cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of
3658 the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so, 3654 the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so,
3659 just run the buildman script (tools/buildman/buildman), which will 3655 just run the buildman script (tools/buildman/buildman), which will
3660 configure and build U-Boot for ALL supported system. Be warned, this 3656 configure and build U-Boot for ALL supported system. Be warned, this
3661 will take a while. Please see the buildman README, or run 'buildman -H' 3657 will take a while. Please see the buildman README, or run 'buildman -H'
3662 for documentation. 3658 for documentation.
3663 3659
3664 3660
3665 See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below. 3661 See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below.
3666 3662
3667 3663
3668 Monitor Commands - Overview: 3664 Monitor Commands - Overview:
3669 ============================ 3665 ============================
3670 3666
3671 go - start application at address 'addr' 3667 go - start application at address 'addr'
3672 run - run commands in an environment variable 3668 run - run commands in an environment variable
3673 bootm - boot application image from memory 3669 bootm - boot application image from memory
3674 bootp - boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol 3670 bootp - boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol
3675 bootz - boot zImage from memory 3671 bootz - boot zImage from memory
3676 tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol 3672 tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol
3677 and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip" 3673 and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip"
3678 (and eventually "gatewayip") 3674 (and eventually "gatewayip")
3679 tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol 3675 tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol
3680 rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol 3676 rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol
3681 diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd' 3677 diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd'
3682 loads - load S-Record file over serial line 3678 loads - load S-Record file over serial line
3683 loadb - load binary file over serial line (kermit mode) 3679 loadb - load binary file over serial line (kermit mode)
3684 md - memory display 3680 md - memory display
3685 mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing) 3681 mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing)
3686 nm - memory modify (constant address) 3682 nm - memory modify (constant address)
3687 mw - memory write (fill) 3683 mw - memory write (fill)
3688 cp - memory copy 3684 cp - memory copy
3689 cmp - memory compare 3685 cmp - memory compare
3690 crc32 - checksum calculation 3686 crc32 - checksum calculation
3691 i2c - I2C sub-system 3687 i2c - I2C sub-system
3692 sspi - SPI utility commands 3688 sspi - SPI utility commands
3693 base - print or set address offset 3689 base - print or set address offset
3694 printenv- print environment variables 3690 printenv- print environment variables
3695 setenv - set environment variables 3691 setenv - set environment variables
3696 saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage 3692 saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage
3697 protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection 3693 protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection
3698 erase - erase FLASH memory 3694 erase - erase FLASH memory
3699 flinfo - print FLASH memory information 3695 flinfo - print FLASH memory information
3700 nand - NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand) 3696 nand - NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand)
3701 bdinfo - print Board Info structure 3697 bdinfo - print Board Info structure
3702 iminfo - print header information for application image 3698 iminfo - print header information for application image
3703 coninfo - print console devices and informations 3699 coninfo - print console devices and informations
3704 ide - IDE sub-system 3700 ide - IDE sub-system
3705 loop - infinite loop on address range 3701 loop - infinite loop on address range
3706 loopw - infinite write loop on address range 3702 loopw - infinite write loop on address range
3707 mtest - simple RAM test 3703 mtest - simple RAM test
3708 icache - enable or disable instruction cache 3704 icache - enable or disable instruction cache
3709 dcache - enable or disable data cache 3705 dcache - enable or disable data cache
3710 reset - Perform RESET of the CPU 3706 reset - Perform RESET of the CPU
3711 echo - echo args to console 3707 echo - echo args to console
3712 version - print monitor version 3708 version - print monitor version
3713 help - print online help 3709 help - print online help
3714 ? - alias for 'help' 3710 ? - alias for 'help'
3715 3711
3716 3712
3717 Monitor Commands - Detailed Description: 3713 Monitor Commands - Detailed Description:
3718 ======================================== 3714 ========================================
3719 3715
3720 TODO. 3716 TODO.
3721 3717
3722 For now: just type "help <command>". 3718 For now: just type "help <command>".
3723 3719
3724 3720
3725 Environment Variables: 3721 Environment Variables:
3726 ====================== 3722 ======================
3727 3723
3728 U-Boot supports user configuration using Environment Variables which 3724 U-Boot supports user configuration using Environment Variables which
3729 can be made persistent by saving to Flash memory. 3725 can be made persistent by saving to Flash memory.
3730 3726
3731 Environment Variables are set using "setenv", printed using 3727 Environment Variables are set using "setenv", printed using
3732 "printenv", and saved to Flash using "saveenv". Using "setenv" 3728 "printenv", and saved to Flash using "saveenv". Using "setenv"
3733 without a value can be used to delete a variable from the 3729 without a value can be used to delete a variable from the
3734 environment. As long as you don't save the environment you are 3730 environment. As long as you don't save the environment you are
3735 working with an in-memory copy. In case the Flash area containing the 3731 working with an in-memory copy. In case the Flash area containing the
3736 environment is erased by accident, a default environment is provided. 3732 environment is erased by accident, a default environment is provided.
3737 3733
3738 Some configuration options can be set using Environment Variables. 3734 Some configuration options can be set using Environment Variables.
3739 3735
3740 List of environment variables (most likely not complete): 3736 List of environment variables (most likely not complete):
3741 3737
3742 baudrate - see CONFIG_BAUDRATE 3738 baudrate - see CONFIG_BAUDRATE
3743 3739
3744 bootdelay - see CONFIG_BOOTDELAY 3740 bootdelay - see CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
3745 3741
3746 bootcmd - see CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND 3742 bootcmd - see CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
3747 3743
3748 bootargs - Boot arguments when booting an RTOS image 3744 bootargs - Boot arguments when booting an RTOS image
3749 3745
3750 bootfile - Name of the image to load with TFTP 3746 bootfile - Name of the image to load with TFTP
3751 3747
3752 bootm_low - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm 3748 bootm_low - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
3753 command can be restricted. This variable is given as 3749 command can be restricted. This variable is given as
3754 a hexadecimal number and defines lowest address allowed 3750 a hexadecimal number and defines lowest address allowed
3755 for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_size" 3751 for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_size"
3756 environment variable. Address defined by "bootm_low" is 3752 environment variable. Address defined by "bootm_low" is
3757 also the base of the initial memory mapping for the Linux 3753 also the base of the initial memory mapping for the Linux
3758 kernel -- see the description of CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ and 3754 kernel -- see the description of CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ and
3759 bootm_mapsize. 3755 bootm_mapsize.
3760 3756
3761 bootm_mapsize - Size of the initial memory mapping for the Linux kernel. 3757 bootm_mapsize - Size of the initial memory mapping for the Linux kernel.
3762 This variable is given as a hexadecimal number and it 3758 This variable is given as a hexadecimal number and it
3763 defines the size of the memory region starting at base 3759 defines the size of the memory region starting at base
3764 address bootm_low that is accessible by the Linux kernel 3760 address bootm_low that is accessible by the Linux kernel
3765 during early boot. If unset, CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is used 3761 during early boot. If unset, CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is used
3766 as the default value if it is defined, and bootm_size is 3762 as the default value if it is defined, and bootm_size is
3767 used otherwise. 3763 used otherwise.
3768 3764
3769 bootm_size - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm 3765 bootm_size - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
3770 command can be restricted. This variable is given as 3766 command can be restricted. This variable is given as
3771 a hexadecimal number and defines the size of the region 3767 a hexadecimal number and defines the size of the region
3772 allowed for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_low" 3768 allowed for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_low"
3773 environment variable. 3769 environment variable.
3774 3770
3775 updatefile - Location of the software update file on a TFTP server, used 3771 updatefile - Location of the software update file on a TFTP server, used
3776 by the automatic software update feature. Please refer to 3772 by the automatic software update feature. Please refer to
3777 documentation in doc/README.update for more details. 3773 documentation in doc/README.update for more details.
3778 3774
3779 autoload - if set to "no" (any string beginning with 'n'), 3775 autoload - if set to "no" (any string beginning with 'n'),
3780 "bootp" will just load perform a lookup of the 3776 "bootp" will just load perform a lookup of the
3781 configuration from the BOOTP server, but not try to 3777 configuration from the BOOTP server, but not try to
3782 load any image using TFTP 3778 load any image using TFTP
3783 3779
3784 autostart - if set to "yes", an image loaded using the "bootp", 3780 autostart - if set to "yes", an image loaded using the "bootp",
3785 "rarpboot", "tftpboot" or "diskboot" commands will 3781 "rarpboot", "tftpboot" or "diskboot" commands will
3786 be automatically started (by internally calling 3782 be automatically started (by internally calling
3787 "bootm") 3783 "bootm")
3788 3784
3789 If set to "no", a standalone image passed to the 3785 If set to "no", a standalone image passed to the
3790 "bootm" command will be copied to the load address 3786 "bootm" command will be copied to the load address
3791 (and eventually uncompressed), but NOT be started. 3787 (and eventually uncompressed), but NOT be started.
3792 This can be used to load and uncompress arbitrary 3788 This can be used to load and uncompress arbitrary
3793 data. 3789 data.
3794 3790
3795 fdt_high - if set this restricts the maximum address that the 3791 fdt_high - if set this restricts the maximum address that the
3796 flattened device tree will be copied into upon boot. 3792 flattened device tree will be copied into upon boot.
3797 For example, if you have a system with 1 GB memory 3793 For example, if you have a system with 1 GB memory
3798 at physical address 0x10000000, while Linux kernel 3794 at physical address 0x10000000, while Linux kernel
3799 only recognizes the first 704 MB as low memory, you 3795 only recognizes the first 704 MB as low memory, you
3800 may need to set fdt_high as 0x3C000000 to have the 3796 may need to set fdt_high as 0x3C000000 to have the
3801 device tree blob be copied to the maximum address 3797 device tree blob be copied to the maximum address
3802 of the 704 MB low memory, so that Linux kernel can 3798 of the 704 MB low memory, so that Linux kernel can
3803 access it during the boot procedure. 3799 access it during the boot procedure.
3804 3800
3805 If this is set to the special value 0xFFFFFFFF then 3801 If this is set to the special value 0xFFFFFFFF then
3806 the fdt will not be copied at all on boot. For this 3802 the fdt will not be copied at all on boot. For this
3807 to work it must reside in writable memory, have 3803 to work it must reside in writable memory, have
3808 sufficient padding on the end of it for u-boot to 3804 sufficient padding on the end of it for u-boot to
3809 add the information it needs into it, and the memory 3805 add the information it needs into it, and the memory
3810 must be accessible by the kernel. 3806 must be accessible by the kernel.
3811 3807
3812 fdtcontroladdr- if set this is the address of the control flattened 3808 fdtcontroladdr- if set this is the address of the control flattened
3813 device tree used by U-Boot when CONFIG_OF_CONTROL is 3809 device tree used by U-Boot when CONFIG_OF_CONTROL is
3814 defined. 3810 defined.
3815 3811
3816 i2cfast - (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only) 3812 i2cfast - (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only)
3817 if set to 'y' configures Linux I2C driver for fast 3813 if set to 'y' configures Linux I2C driver for fast
3818 mode (400kHZ). This environment variable is used in 3814 mode (400kHZ). This environment variable is used in
3819 initialization code. So, for changes to be effective 3815 initialization code. So, for changes to be effective
3820 it must be saved and board must be reset. 3816 it must be saved and board must be reset.
3821 3817
3822 initrd_high - restrict positioning of initrd images: 3818 initrd_high - restrict positioning of initrd images:
3823 If this variable is not set, initrd images will be 3819 If this variable is not set, initrd images will be
3824 copied to the highest possible address in RAM; this 3820 copied to the highest possible address in RAM; this
3825 is usually what you want since it allows for 3821 is usually what you want since it allows for
3826 maximum initrd size. If for some reason you want to 3822 maximum initrd size. If for some reason you want to
3827 make sure that the initrd image is loaded below the 3823 make sure that the initrd image is loaded below the
3828 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ limit, you can set this environment 3824 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ limit, you can set this environment
3829 variable to a value of "no" or "off" or "0". 3825 variable to a value of "no" or "off" or "0".
3830 Alternatively, you can set it to a maximum upper 3826 Alternatively, you can set it to a maximum upper
3831 address to use (U-Boot will still check that it 3827 address to use (U-Boot will still check that it
3832 does not overwrite the U-Boot stack and data). 3828 does not overwrite the U-Boot stack and data).
3833 3829
3834 For instance, when you have a system with 16 MB 3830 For instance, when you have a system with 16 MB
3835 RAM, and want to reserve 4 MB from use by Linux, 3831 RAM, and want to reserve 4 MB from use by Linux,
3836 you can do this by adding "mem=12M" to the value of 3832 you can do this by adding "mem=12M" to the value of
3837 the "bootargs" variable. However, now you must make 3833 the "bootargs" variable. However, now you must make
3838 sure that the initrd image is placed in the first 3834 sure that the initrd image is placed in the first
3839 12 MB as well - this can be done with 3835 12 MB as well - this can be done with
3840 3836
3841 setenv initrd_high 00c00000 3837 setenv initrd_high 00c00000
3842 3838
3843 If you set initrd_high to 0xFFFFFFFF, this is an 3839 If you set initrd_high to 0xFFFFFFFF, this is an
3844 indication to U-Boot that all addresses are legal 3840 indication to U-Boot that all addresses are legal
3845 for the Linux kernel, including addresses in flash 3841 for the Linux kernel, including addresses in flash
3846 memory. In this case U-Boot will NOT COPY the 3842 memory. In this case U-Boot will NOT COPY the
3847 ramdisk at all. This may be useful to reduce the 3843 ramdisk at all. This may be useful to reduce the
3848 boot time on your system, but requires that this 3844 boot time on your system, but requires that this
3849 feature is supported by your Linux kernel. 3845 feature is supported by your Linux kernel.
3850 3846
3851 ipaddr - IP address; needed for tftpboot command 3847 ipaddr - IP address; needed for tftpboot command
3852 3848
3853 loadaddr - Default load address for commands like "bootp", 3849 loadaddr - Default load address for commands like "bootp",
3854 "rarpboot", "tftpboot", "loadb" or "diskboot" 3850 "rarpboot", "tftpboot", "loadb" or "diskboot"
3855 3851
3856 loads_echo - see CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO 3852 loads_echo - see CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
3857 3853
3858 serverip - TFTP server IP address; needed for tftpboot command 3854 serverip - TFTP server IP address; needed for tftpboot command
3859 3855
3860 bootretry - see CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME 3856 bootretry - see CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME
3861 3857
3862 bootdelaykey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR 3858 bootdelaykey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR
3863 3859
3864 bootstopkey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR 3860 bootstopkey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR
3865 3861
3866 ethprime - controls which interface is used first. 3862 ethprime - controls which interface is used first.
3867 3863
3868 ethact - controls which interface is currently active. 3864 ethact - controls which interface is currently active.
3869 For example you can do the following 3865 For example you can do the following
3870 3866
3871 => setenv ethact FEC 3867 => setenv ethact FEC
3872 => ping 192.168.0.1 # traffic sent on FEC 3868 => ping 192.168.0.1 # traffic sent on FEC
3873 => setenv ethact SCC 3869 => setenv ethact SCC
3874 => ping 10.0.0.1 # traffic sent on SCC 3870 => ping 10.0.0.1 # traffic sent on SCC
3875 3871
3876 ethrotate - When set to "no" U-Boot does not go through all 3872 ethrotate - When set to "no" U-Boot does not go through all
3877 available network interfaces. 3873 available network interfaces.
3878 It just stays at the currently selected interface. 3874 It just stays at the currently selected interface.
3879 3875
3880 netretry - When set to "no" each network operation will 3876 netretry - When set to "no" each network operation will
3881 either succeed or fail without retrying. 3877 either succeed or fail without retrying.
3882 When set to "once" the network operation will 3878 When set to "once" the network operation will
3883 fail when all the available network interfaces 3879 fail when all the available network interfaces
3884 are tried once without success. 3880 are tried once without success.
3885 Useful on scripts which control the retry operation 3881 Useful on scripts which control the retry operation
3886 themselves. 3882 themselves.
3887 3883
3888 npe_ucode - set load address for the NPE microcode 3884 npe_ucode - set load address for the NPE microcode
3889 3885
3890 silent_linux - If set then Linux will be told to boot silently, by 3886 silent_linux - If set then Linux will be told to boot silently, by
3891 changing the console to be empty. If "yes" it will be 3887 changing the console to be empty. If "yes" it will be
3892 made silent. If "no" it will not be made silent. If 3888 made silent. If "no" it will not be made silent. If
3893 unset, then it will be made silent if the U-Boot console 3889 unset, then it will be made silent if the U-Boot console
3894 is silent. 3890 is silent.
3895 3891
3896 tftpsrcp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's 3892 tftpsrcp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's
3897 UDP source port. 3893 UDP source port.
3898 3894
3899 tftpdstp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's UDP 3895 tftpdstp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's UDP
3900 destination port instead of the Well Know Port 69. 3896 destination port instead of the Well Know Port 69.
3901 3897
3902 tftpblocksize - Block size to use for TFTP transfers; if not set, 3898 tftpblocksize - Block size to use for TFTP transfers; if not set,
3903 we use the TFTP server's default block size 3899 we use the TFTP server's default block size
3904 3900
3905 tftptimeout - Retransmission timeout for TFTP packets (in milli- 3901 tftptimeout - Retransmission timeout for TFTP packets (in milli-
3906 seconds, minimum value is 1000 = 1 second). Defines 3902 seconds, minimum value is 1000 = 1 second). Defines
3907 when a packet is considered to be lost so it has to 3903 when a packet is considered to be lost so it has to
3908 be retransmitted. The default is 5000 = 5 seconds. 3904 be retransmitted. The default is 5000 = 5 seconds.
3909 Lowering this value may make downloads succeed 3905 Lowering this value may make downloads succeed
3910 faster in networks with high packet loss rates or 3906 faster in networks with high packet loss rates or
3911 with unreliable TFTP servers. 3907 with unreliable TFTP servers.
3912 3908
3913 tftptimeoutcountmax - maximum count of TFTP timeouts (no 3909 tftptimeoutcountmax - maximum count of TFTP timeouts (no
3914 unit, minimum value = 0). Defines how many timeouts 3910 unit, minimum value = 0). Defines how many timeouts
3915 can happen during a single file transfer before that 3911 can happen during a single file transfer before that
3916 transfer is aborted. The default is 10, and 0 means 3912 transfer is aborted. The default is 10, and 0 means
3917 'no timeouts allowed'. Increasing this value may help 3913 'no timeouts allowed'. Increasing this value may help
3918 downloads succeed with high packet loss rates, or with 3914 downloads succeed with high packet loss rates, or with
3919 unreliable TFTP servers or client hardware. 3915 unreliable TFTP servers or client hardware.
3920 3916
3921 vlan - When set to a value < 4095 the traffic over 3917 vlan - When set to a value < 4095 the traffic over
3922 Ethernet is encapsulated/received over 802.1q 3918 Ethernet is encapsulated/received over 802.1q
3923 VLAN tagged frames. 3919 VLAN tagged frames.
3924 3920
3925 bootpretryperiod - Period during which BOOTP/DHCP sends retries. 3921 bootpretryperiod - Period during which BOOTP/DHCP sends retries.
3926 Unsigned value, in milliseconds. If not set, the period will 3922 Unsigned value, in milliseconds. If not set, the period will
3927 be either the default (28000), or a value based on 3923 be either the default (28000), or a value based on
3928 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT, if defined. This value has 3924 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT, if defined. This value has
3929 precedence over the valu based on CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT. 3925 precedence over the valu based on CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT.
3930 3926
3931 The following image location variables contain the location of images 3927 The following image location variables contain the location of images
3932 used in booting. The "Image" column gives the role of the image and is 3928 used in booting. The "Image" column gives the role of the image and is
3933 not an environment variable name. The other columns are environment 3929 not an environment variable name. The other columns are environment
3934 variable names. "File Name" gives the name of the file on a TFTP 3930 variable names. "File Name" gives the name of the file on a TFTP
3935 server, "RAM Address" gives the location in RAM the image will be 3931 server, "RAM Address" gives the location in RAM the image will be
3936 loaded to, and "Flash Location" gives the image's address in NOR 3932 loaded to, and "Flash Location" gives the image's address in NOR
3937 flash or offset in NAND flash. 3933 flash or offset in NAND flash.
3938 3934
3939 *Note* - these variables don't have to be defined for all boards, some 3935 *Note* - these variables don't have to be defined for all boards, some
3940 boards currently use other variables for these purposes, and some 3936 boards currently use other variables for these purposes, and some
3941 boards use these variables for other purposes. 3937 boards use these variables for other purposes.
3942 3938
3943 Image File Name RAM Address Flash Location 3939 Image File Name RAM Address Flash Location
3944 ----- --------- ----------- -------------- 3940 ----- --------- ----------- --------------
3945 u-boot u-boot u-boot_addr_r u-boot_addr 3941 u-boot u-boot u-boot_addr_r u-boot_addr
3946 Linux kernel bootfile kernel_addr_r kernel_addr 3942 Linux kernel bootfile kernel_addr_r kernel_addr
3947 device tree blob fdtfile fdt_addr_r fdt_addr 3943 device tree blob fdtfile fdt_addr_r fdt_addr
3948 ramdisk ramdiskfile ramdisk_addr_r ramdisk_addr 3944 ramdisk ramdiskfile ramdisk_addr_r ramdisk_addr
3949 3945
3950 The following environment variables may be used and automatically 3946 The following environment variables may be used and automatically
3951 updated by the network boot commands ("bootp" and "rarpboot"), 3947 updated by the network boot commands ("bootp" and "rarpboot"),
3952 depending the information provided by your boot server: 3948 depending the information provided by your boot server:
3953 3949
3954 bootfile - see above 3950 bootfile - see above
3955 dnsip - IP address of your Domain Name Server 3951 dnsip - IP address of your Domain Name Server
3956 dnsip2 - IP address of your secondary Domain Name Server 3952 dnsip2 - IP address of your secondary Domain Name Server
3957 gatewayip - IP address of the Gateway (Router) to use 3953 gatewayip - IP address of the Gateway (Router) to use
3958 hostname - Target hostname 3954 hostname - Target hostname
3959 ipaddr - see above 3955 ipaddr - see above
3960 netmask - Subnet Mask 3956 netmask - Subnet Mask
3961 rootpath - Pathname of the root filesystem on the NFS server 3957 rootpath - Pathname of the root filesystem on the NFS server
3962 serverip - see above 3958 serverip - see above
3963 3959
3964 3960
3965 There are two special Environment Variables: 3961 There are two special Environment Variables:
3966 3962
3967 serial# - contains hardware identification information such 3963 serial# - contains hardware identification information such
3968 as type string and/or serial number 3964 as type string and/or serial number
3969 ethaddr - Ethernet address 3965 ethaddr - Ethernet address
3970 3966
3971 These variables can be set only once (usually during manufacturing of 3967 These variables can be set only once (usually during manufacturing of
3972 the board). U-Boot refuses to delete or overwrite these variables 3968 the board). U-Boot refuses to delete or overwrite these variables
3973 once they have been set once. 3969 once they have been set once.
3974 3970
3975 3971
3976 Further special Environment Variables: 3972 Further special Environment Variables:
3977 3973
3978 ver - Contains the U-Boot version string as printed 3974 ver - Contains the U-Boot version string as printed
3979 with the "version" command. This variable is 3975 with the "version" command. This variable is
3980 readonly (see CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE). 3976 readonly (see CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE).
3981 3977
3982 3978
3983 Please note that changes to some configuration parameters may take 3979 Please note that changes to some configuration parameters may take
3984 only effect after the next boot (yes, that's just like Windoze :-). 3980 only effect after the next boot (yes, that's just like Windoze :-).
3985 3981
3986 3982
3987 Callback functions for environment variables: 3983 Callback functions for environment variables:
3988 --------------------------------------------- 3984 ---------------------------------------------
3989 3985
3990 For some environment variables, the behavior of u-boot needs to change 3986 For some environment variables, the behavior of u-boot needs to change
3991 when their values are changed. This functionality allows functions to 3987 when their values are changed. This functionality allows functions to
3992 be associated with arbitrary variables. On creation, overwrite, or 3988 be associated with arbitrary variables. On creation, overwrite, or
3993 deletion, the callback will provide the opportunity for some side 3989 deletion, the callback will provide the opportunity for some side
3994 effect to happen or for the change to be rejected. 3990 effect to happen or for the change to be rejected.
3995 3991
3996 The callbacks are named and associated with a function using the 3992 The callbacks are named and associated with a function using the
3997 U_BOOT_ENV_CALLBACK macro in your board or driver code. 3993 U_BOOT_ENV_CALLBACK macro in your board or driver code.
3998 3994
3999 These callbacks are associated with variables in one of two ways. The 3995 These callbacks are associated with variables in one of two ways. The
4000 static list can be added to by defining CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_STATIC 3996 static list can be added to by defining CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_STATIC
4001 in the board configuration to a string that defines a list of 3997 in the board configuration to a string that defines a list of
4002 associations. The list must be in the following format: 3998 associations. The list must be in the following format:
4003 3999
4004 entry = variable_name[:callback_name] 4000 entry = variable_name[:callback_name]
4005 list = entry[,list] 4001 list = entry[,list]
4006 4002
4007 If the callback name is not specified, then the callback is deleted. 4003 If the callback name is not specified, then the callback is deleted.
4008 Spaces are also allowed anywhere in the list. 4004 Spaces are also allowed anywhere in the list.
4009 4005
4010 Callbacks can also be associated by defining the ".callbacks" variable 4006 Callbacks can also be associated by defining the ".callbacks" variable
4011 with the same list format above. Any association in ".callbacks" will 4007 with the same list format above. Any association in ".callbacks" will
4012 override any association in the static list. You can define 4008 override any association in the static list. You can define
4013 CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_DEFAULT to a list (string) to define the 4009 CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_DEFAULT to a list (string) to define the
4014 ".callbacks" environment variable in the default or embedded environment. 4010 ".callbacks" environment variable in the default or embedded environment.
4015 4011
4016 If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a 4012 If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a
4017 regular expression. This allows multiple variables to be connected to 4013 regular expression. This allows multiple variables to be connected to
4018 the same callback without explicitly listing them all out. 4014 the same callback without explicitly listing them all out.
4019 4015
4020 4016
4021 Command Line Parsing: 4017 Command Line Parsing:
4022 ===================== 4018 =====================
4023 4019
4024 There are two different command line parsers available with U-Boot: 4020 There are two different command line parsers available with U-Boot:
4025 the old "simple" one, and the much more powerful "hush" shell: 4021 the old "simple" one, and the much more powerful "hush" shell:
4026 4022
4027 Old, simple command line parser: 4023 Old, simple command line parser:
4028 -------------------------------- 4024 --------------------------------
4029 4025
4030 - supports environment variables (through setenv / saveenv commands) 4026 - supports environment variables (through setenv / saveenv commands)
4031 - several commands on one line, separated by ';' 4027 - several commands on one line, separated by ';'
4032 - variable substitution using "... ${name} ..." syntax 4028 - variable substitution using "... ${name} ..." syntax
4033 - special characters ('$', ';') can be escaped by prefixing with '\', 4029 - special characters ('$', ';') can be escaped by prefixing with '\',
4034 for example: 4030 for example:
4035 setenv bootcmd bootm \${address} 4031 setenv bootcmd bootm \${address}
4036 - You can also escape text by enclosing in single apostrophes, for example: 4032 - You can also escape text by enclosing in single apostrophes, for example:
4037 setenv addip 'setenv bootargs $bootargs ip=$ipaddr:$serverip:$gatewayip:$netmask:$hostname::off' 4033 setenv addip 'setenv bootargs $bootargs ip=$ipaddr:$serverip:$gatewayip:$netmask:$hostname::off'
4038 4034
4039 Hush shell: 4035 Hush shell:
4040 ----------- 4036 -----------
4041 4037
4042 - similar to Bourne shell, with control structures like 4038 - similar to Bourne shell, with control structures like
4043 if...then...else...fi, for...do...done; while...do...done, 4039 if...then...else...fi, for...do...done; while...do...done,
4044 until...do...done, ... 4040 until...do...done, ...
4045 - supports environment ("global") variables (through setenv / saveenv 4041 - supports environment ("global") variables (through setenv / saveenv
4046 commands) and local shell variables (through standard shell syntax 4042 commands) and local shell variables (through standard shell syntax
4047 "name=value"); only environment variables can be used with "run" 4043 "name=value"); only environment variables can be used with "run"
4048 command 4044 command
4049 4045
4050 General rules: 4046 General rules:
4051 -------------- 4047 --------------
4052 4048
4053 (1) If a command line (or an environment variable executed by a "run" 4049 (1) If a command line (or an environment variable executed by a "run"
4054 command) contains several commands separated by semicolon, and 4050 command) contains several commands separated by semicolon, and
4055 one of these commands fails, then the remaining commands will be 4051 one of these commands fails, then the remaining commands will be
4056 executed anyway. 4052 executed anyway.
4057 4053
4058 (2) If you execute several variables with one call to run (i. e. 4054 (2) If you execute several variables with one call to run (i. e.
4059 calling run with a list of variables as arguments), any failing 4055 calling run with a list of variables as arguments), any failing
4060 command will cause "run" to terminate, i. e. the remaining 4056 command will cause "run" to terminate, i. e. the remaining
4061 variables are not executed. 4057 variables are not executed.
4062 4058
4063 Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces: 4059 Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces:
4064 ======================================= 4060 =======================================
4065 4061
4066 Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports 4062 Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports
4067 such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a 4063 such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a
4068 "working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows: 4064 "working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows:
4069 4065
4070 Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding 4066 Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding
4071 MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0), 4067 MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0),
4072 "eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ... 4068 "eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ...
4073 4069
4074 If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance 4070 If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance
4075 in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon- 4071 in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon-
4076 ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment 4072 ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment
4077 variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means: 4073 variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means:
4078 4074
4079 o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the 4075 o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the
4080 environment, the SROM's address is used. 4076 environment, the SROM's address is used.
4081 4077
4082 o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the 4078 o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the
4083 environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is 4079 environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is
4084 used. 4080 used.
4085 4081
4086 o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and 4082 o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and
4087 both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used. 4083 both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used.
4088 4084
4089 o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the 4085 o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the
4090 addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a 4086 addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a
4091 warning is printed. 4087 warning is printed.
4092 4088
4093 o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error 4089 o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error
4094 is raised. If CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, then in this case 4090 is raised. If CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, then in this case
4095 a random, locally-assigned MAC is used. 4091 a random, locally-assigned MAC is used.
4096 4092
4097 If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses 4093 If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses
4098 will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process. This 4094 will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process. This
4099 may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable. 4095 may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable.
4100 The naming convention is as follows: 4096 The naming convention is as follows:
4101 "ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc. 4097 "ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc.
4102 4098
4103 Image Formats: 4099 Image Formats:
4104 ============== 4100 ==============
4105 4101
4106 U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on) 4102 U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on)
4107 images in two formats: 4103 images in two formats:
4108 4104
4109 New uImage format (FIT) 4105 New uImage format (FIT)
4110 ----------------------- 4106 -----------------------
4111 4107
4112 Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar 4108 Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar
4113 to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple 4109 to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple
4114 components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by 4110 components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by
4115 SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory. 4111 SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory.
4116 4112
4117 4113
4118 Old uImage format 4114 Old uImage format
4119 ----------------- 4115 -----------------
4120 4116
4121 Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything, 4117 Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything,
4122 preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for 4118 preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for
4123 details; basically, the header defines the following image properties: 4119 details; basically, the header defines the following image properties:
4124 4120
4125 * Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD, 4121 * Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD,
4126 4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks, 4122 4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks,
4127 LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY; 4123 LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY;
4128 Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, LynxOS, 4124 Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, LynxOS,
4129 INTEGRITY). 4125 INTEGRITY).
4130 * Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, Intel x86, 4126 * Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, Intel x86,
4131 IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit; 4127 IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit;
4132 Currently supported: ARM, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC). 4128 Currently supported: ARM, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC).
4133 * Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2) 4129 * Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2)
4134 * Load Address 4130 * Load Address
4135 * Entry Point 4131 * Entry Point
4136 * Image Name 4132 * Image Name
4137 * Image Timestamp 4133 * Image Timestamp
4138 4134
4139 The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header 4135 The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header
4140 and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by 4136 and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by
4141 CRC32 checksums. 4137 CRC32 checksums.
4142 4138
4143 4139
4144 Linux Support: 4140 Linux Support:
4145 ============== 4141 ==============
4146 4142
4147 Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application 4143 Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application
4148 easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of 4144 easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of
4149 U-Boot. 4145 U-Boot.
4150 4146
4151 U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some 4147 U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some
4152 special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any 4148 special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any
4153 "initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image; 4149 "initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image;
4154 instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation 4150 instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation
4155 serves several purposes: 4151 serves several purposes:
4156 4152
4157 - the same features can be used for other OS or standalone 4153 - the same features can be used for other OS or standalone
4158 applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the 4154 applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the
4159 Flash memory footprint) 4155 Flash memory footprint)
4160 4156
4161 - it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because 4157 - it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because
4162 lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot 4158 lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot
4163 4159
4164 - the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd" 4160 - the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd"
4165 images; of course this also means that different kernel images can 4161 images; of course this also means that different kernel images can
4166 be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't 4162 be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't
4167 have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just 4163 have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just
4168 change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the 4164 change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the
4169 software is easier now. 4165 software is easier now.
4170 4166
4171 4167
4172 Linux HOWTO: 4168 Linux HOWTO:
4173 ============ 4169 ============
4174 4170
4175 Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems: 4171 Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems:
4176 --------------------------------------- 4172 ---------------------------------------
4177 4173
4178 U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to 4174 U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to
4179 configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware 4175 configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware
4180 (no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to 4176 (no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to
4181 Linux :-). 4177 Linux :-).
4182 4178
4183 But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot). 4179 But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot).
4184 4180
4185 Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance 4181 Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance
4186 include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board 4182 include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board
4187 Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h, 4183 Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h,
4188 and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value 4184 and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value
4189 as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR. 4185 as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR.
4190 4186
4191 Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers. 4187 Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers.
4192 If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there 4188 If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there
4193 is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See 4189 is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See
4194 doc/driver-model. 4190 doc/driver-model.
4195 4191
4196 4192
4197 Configuring the Linux kernel: 4193 Configuring the Linux kernel:
4198 ----------------------------- 4194 -----------------------------
4199 4195
4200 No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root 4196 No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root
4201 device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system. 4197 device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system.
4202 4198
4203 4199
4204 Building a Linux Image: 4200 Building a Linux Image:
4205 ----------------------- 4201 -----------------------
4206 4202
4207 With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are 4203 With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are
4208 not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target 4204 not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target
4209 "uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by 4205 "uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by
4210 U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target, 4206 U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target,
4211 which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a 4207 which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a
4212 100% compatible format. 4208 100% compatible format.
4213 4209
4214 Example: 4210 Example:
4215 4211
4216 make TQM850L_defconfig 4212 make TQM850L_defconfig
4217 make oldconfig 4213 make oldconfig
4218 make dep 4214 make dep
4219 make uImage 4215 make uImage
4220 4216
4221 The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to 4217 The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to
4222 encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header information, 4218 encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header information,
4223 CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing: 4219 CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing:
4224 4220
4225 * build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format): 4221 * build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format):
4226 4222
4227 * convert the kernel into a raw binary image: 4223 * convert the kernel into a raw binary image:
4228 4224
4229 ${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \ 4225 ${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \
4230 -R .note -R .comment \ 4226 -R .note -R .comment \
4231 -S vmlinux linux.bin 4227 -S vmlinux linux.bin
4232 4228
4233 * compress the binary image: 4229 * compress the binary image:
4234 4230
4235 gzip -9 linux.bin 4231 gzip -9 linux.bin
4236 4232
4237 * package compressed binary image for U-Boot: 4233 * package compressed binary image for U-Boot:
4238 4234
4239 mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \ 4235 mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \
4240 -a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \ 4236 -a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \
4241 -d linux.bin.gz uImage 4237 -d linux.bin.gz uImage
4242 4238
4243 4239
4244 The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use 4240 The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use
4245 with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or 4241 with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or
4246 combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64 4242 combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64
4247 byte header containing information about target architecture, 4243 byte header containing information about target architecture,
4248 operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time 4244 operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time
4249 stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc. 4245 stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc.
4250 4246
4251 "mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and 4247 "mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and
4252 print the header information, or to build new images. 4248 print the header information, or to build new images.
4253 4249
4254 In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information 4250 In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information
4255 contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes 4251 contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes
4256 checksum verification: 4252 checksum verification:
4257 4253
4258 tools/mkimage -l image 4254 tools/mkimage -l image
4259 -l ==> list image header information 4255 -l ==> list image header information
4260 4256
4261 The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image 4257 The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image
4262 from a "data file" which is used as image payload: 4258 from a "data file" which is used as image payload:
4263 4259
4264 tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \ 4260 tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \
4265 -n name -d data_file image 4261 -n name -d data_file image
4266 -A ==> set architecture to 'arch' 4262 -A ==> set architecture to 'arch'
4267 -O ==> set operating system to 'os' 4263 -O ==> set operating system to 'os'
4268 -T ==> set image type to 'type' 4264 -T ==> set image type to 'type'
4269 -C ==> set compression type 'comp' 4265 -C ==> set compression type 'comp'
4270 -a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex) 4266 -a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex)
4271 -e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex) 4267 -e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex)
4272 -n ==> set image name to 'name' 4268 -n ==> set image name to 'name'
4273 -d ==> use image data from 'datafile' 4269 -d ==> use image data from 'datafile'
4274 4270
4275 Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load 4271 Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load
4276 address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the 4272 address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the
4277 kernel version: 4273 kernel version:
4278 4274
4279 - 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C, 4275 - 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C,
4280 - 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000. 4276 - 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000.
4281 4277
4282 So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read: 4278 So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read:
4283 4279
4284 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \ 4280 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
4285 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \ 4281 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \
4286 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \ 4282 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \
4287 > examples/uImage.TQM850L 4283 > examples/uImage.TQM850L
4288 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L 4284 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
4289 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 4285 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
4290 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4286 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4291 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB 4287 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
4292 Load Address: 0x00000000 4288 Load Address: 0x00000000
4293 Entry Point: 0x00000000 4289 Entry Point: 0x00000000
4294 4290
4295 To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption): 4291 To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption):
4296 4292
4297 -> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L 4293 -> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L
4298 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L 4294 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
4299 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 4295 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
4300 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4296 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4301 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB 4297 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
4302 Load Address: 0x00000000 4298 Load Address: 0x00000000
4303 Entry Point: 0x00000000 4299 Entry Point: 0x00000000
4304 4300
4305 NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade 4301 NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade
4306 speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this 4302 speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this
4307 needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not 4303 needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not
4308 need to be uncompressed: 4304 need to be uncompressed:
4309 4305
4310 -> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz 4306 -> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz
4311 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \ 4307 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
4312 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \ 4308 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \
4313 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \ 4309 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \
4314 > examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed 4310 > examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed
4315 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L 4311 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
4316 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 4312 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
4317 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed) 4313 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed)
4318 Data Size: 792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB 4314 Data Size: 792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB
4319 Load Address: 0x00000000 4315 Load Address: 0x00000000
4320 Entry Point: 0x00000000 4316 Entry Point: 0x00000000
4321 4317
4322 4318
4323 Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file 4319 Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file
4324 when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk: 4320 when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk:
4325 4321
4326 -> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \ 4322 -> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \
4327 > -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \ 4323 > -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \
4328 > -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd 4324 > -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd
4329 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image 4325 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
4330 Created: Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000 4326 Created: Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000
4331 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) 4327 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
4332 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB 4328 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB
4333 Load Address: 0x00000000 4329 Load Address: 0x00000000
4334 Entry Point: 0x00000000 4330 Entry Point: 0x00000000
4335 4331
4336 The "dumpimage" is a tool to disassemble images built by mkimage. Its "-i" 4332 The "dumpimage" is a tool to disassemble images built by mkimage. Its "-i"
4337 option performs the converse operation of the mkimage's second form (the "-d" 4333 option performs the converse operation of the mkimage's second form (the "-d"
4338 option). Given an image built by mkimage, the dumpimage extracts a "data file" 4334 option). Given an image built by mkimage, the dumpimage extracts a "data file"
4339 from the image: 4335 from the image:
4340 4336
4341 tools/dumpimage -i image -T type -p position data_file 4337 tools/dumpimage -i image -T type -p position data_file
4342 -i ==> extract from the 'image' a specific 'data_file' 4338 -i ==> extract from the 'image' a specific 'data_file'
4343 -T ==> set image type to 'type' 4339 -T ==> set image type to 'type'
4344 -p ==> 'position' (starting at 0) of the 'data_file' inside the 'image' 4340 -p ==> 'position' (starting at 0) of the 'data_file' inside the 'image'
4345 4341
4346 4342
4347 Installing a Linux Image: 4343 Installing a Linux Image:
4348 ------------------------- 4344 -------------------------
4349 4345
4350 To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface, 4346 To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface,
4351 you must convert the image to S-Record format: 4347 you must convert the image to S-Record format:
4352 4348
4353 objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec 4349 objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec
4354 4350
4355 The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot 4351 The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot
4356 image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to 4352 image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to
4357 address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to 4353 address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to
4358 specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads' 4354 specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads'
4359 command. 4355 command.
4360 4356
4361 Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the 4357 Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the
4362 TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank): 4358 TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank):
4363 4359
4364 => erase 40100000 401FFFFF 4360 => erase 40100000 401FFFFF
4365 4361
4366 .......... done 4362 .......... done
4367 Erased 8 sectors 4363 Erased 8 sectors
4368 4364
4369 => loads 40100000 4365 => loads 40100000
4370 ## Ready for S-Record download ... 4366 ## Ready for S-Record download ...
4371 ~>examples/image.srec 4367 ~>examples/image.srec
4372 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ... 4368 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...
4373 ... 4369 ...
4374 15989 15990 15991 15992 4370 15989 15990 15991 15992
4375 [file transfer complete] 4371 [file transfer complete]
4376 [connected] 4372 [connected]
4377 ## Start Addr = 0x00000000 4373 ## Start Addr = 0x00000000
4378 4374
4379 4375
4380 You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command; 4376 You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command;
4381 this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data 4377 this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data
4382 corruption happened: 4378 corruption happened:
4383 4379
4384 => imi 40100000 4380 => imi 40100000
4385 4381
4386 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ... 4382 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
4387 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L 4383 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
4388 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4384 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4389 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB 4385 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
4390 Load Address: 00000000 4386 Load Address: 00000000
4391 Entry Point: 0000000c 4387 Entry Point: 0000000c
4392 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4388 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4393 4389
4394 4390
4395 Boot Linux: 4391 Boot Linux:
4396 ----------- 4392 -----------
4397 4393
4398 The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in 4394 The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in
4399 memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents 4395 memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents
4400 of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as 4396 of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as
4401 parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the 4397 parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the
4402 "printenv" and "setenv" commands: 4398 "printenv" and "setenv" commands:
4403 4399
4404 4400
4405 => printenv bootargs 4401 => printenv bootargs
4406 bootargs=root=/dev/ram 4402 bootargs=root=/dev/ram
4407 4403
4408 => setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 4404 => setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
4409 4405
4410 => printenv bootargs 4406 => printenv bootargs
4411 bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 4407 bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
4412 4408
4413 => bootm 40020000 4409 => bootm 40020000
4414 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ... 4410 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ...
4415 Image Name: 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L 4411 Image Name: 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L
4416 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4412 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4417 Data Size: 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB 4413 Data Size: 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB
4418 Load Address: 00000000 4414 Load Address: 00000000
4419 Entry Point: 0000000c 4415 Entry Point: 0000000c
4420 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4416 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4421 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK 4417 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
4422 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000 4418 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000
4423 Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 4419 Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
4424 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60 4420 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
4425 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS 4421 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
4426 Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000] 4422 Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000]
4427 ... 4423 ...
4428 4424
4429 If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass 4425 If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass
4430 the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT 4426 the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT
4431 format!) to the "bootm" command: 4427 format!) to the "bootm" command:
4432 4428
4433 => imi 40100000 40200000 4429 => imi 40100000 40200000
4434 4430
4435 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ... 4431 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
4436 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L 4432 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
4437 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4433 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4438 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB 4434 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
4439 Load Address: 00000000 4435 Load Address: 00000000
4440 Entry Point: 0000000c 4436 Entry Point: 0000000c
4441 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4437 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4442 4438
4443 ## Checking Image at 40200000 ... 4439 ## Checking Image at 40200000 ...
4444 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image 4440 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
4445 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) 4441 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
4446 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB 4442 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
4447 Load Address: 00000000 4443 Load Address: 00000000
4448 Entry Point: 00000000 4444 Entry Point: 00000000
4449 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4445 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4450 4446
4451 => bootm 40100000 40200000 4447 => bootm 40100000 40200000
4452 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ... 4448 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ...
4453 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L 4449 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
4454 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4450 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4455 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB 4451 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
4456 Load Address: 00000000 4452 Load Address: 00000000
4457 Entry Point: 0000000c 4453 Entry Point: 0000000c
4458 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4454 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4459 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK 4455 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
4460 ## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ... 4456 ## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ...
4461 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image 4457 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
4462 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) 4458 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
4463 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB 4459 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
4464 Load Address: 00000000 4460 Load Address: 00000000
4465 Entry Point: 00000000 4461 Entry Point: 00000000
4466 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4462 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4467 Loading Ramdisk ... OK 4463 Loading Ramdisk ... OK
4468 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000 4464 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000
4469 Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram 4465 Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram
4470 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60 4466 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
4471 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS 4467 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
4472 ... 4468 ...
4473 RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0 4469 RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0
4474 VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem). 4470 VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem).
4475 4471
4476 bash# 4472 bash#
4477 4473
4478 Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree: 4474 Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree:
4479 ----------- 4475 -----------
4480 4476
4481 First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section 4477 First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section
4482 titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The 4478 titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The
4483 following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated 4479 following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated
4484 flat device tree: 4480 flat device tree:
4485 4481
4486 => print oftaddr 4482 => print oftaddr
4487 oftaddr=0x300000 4483 oftaddr=0x300000
4488 => print oft 4484 => print oft
4489 oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb 4485 oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb
4490 => tftp $oftaddr $oft 4486 => tftp $oftaddr $oft
4491 Speed: 1000, full duplex 4487 Speed: 1000, full duplex
4492 Using TSEC0 device 4488 Using TSEC0 device
4493 TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101 4489 TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101
4494 Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'. 4490 Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'.
4495 Load address: 0x300000 4491 Load address: 0x300000
4496 Loading: # 4492 Loading: #
4497 done 4493 done
4498 Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex) 4494 Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex)
4499 => tftp $loadaddr $bootfile 4495 => tftp $loadaddr $bootfile
4500 Speed: 1000, full duplex 4496 Speed: 1000, full duplex
4501 Using TSEC0 device 4497 Using TSEC0 device
4502 TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2 4498 TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2
4503 Filename 'uImage'. 4499 Filename 'uImage'.
4504 Load address: 0x200000 4500 Load address: 0x200000
4505 Loading:############ 4501 Loading:############
4506 done 4502 done
4507 Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex) 4503 Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex)
4508 => print loadaddr 4504 => print loadaddr
4509 loadaddr=200000 4505 loadaddr=200000
4510 => print oftaddr 4506 => print oftaddr
4511 oftaddr=0x300000 4507 oftaddr=0x300000
4512 => bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr 4508 => bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr
4513 ## Booting image at 00200000 ... 4509 ## Booting image at 00200000 ...
4514 Image Name: Linux-2.6.17-dirty 4510 Image Name: Linux-2.6.17-dirty
4515 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4511 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4516 Data Size: 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB 4512 Data Size: 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB
4517 Load Address: 00000000 4513 Load Address: 00000000
4518 Entry Point: 00000000 4514 Entry Point: 00000000
4519 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4515 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4520 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK 4516 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
4521 Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000 4517 Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000
4522 Using MPC85xx ADS machine description 4518 Using MPC85xx ADS machine description
4523 Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb 4519 Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb
4524 [snip] 4520 [snip]
4525 4521
4526 4522
4527 More About U-Boot Image Types: 4523 More About U-Boot Image Types:
4528 ------------------------------ 4524 ------------------------------
4529 4525
4530 U-Boot supports the following image types: 4526 U-Boot supports the following image types:
4531 4527
4532 "Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment 4528 "Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment
4533 provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave 4529 provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave
4534 well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from 4530 well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from
4535 the Standalone Program. 4531 the Standalone Program.
4536 "OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which 4532 "OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which
4537 will take over control completely. Usually these programs 4533 will take over control completely. Usually these programs
4538 will install their own set of exception handlers, device 4534 will install their own set of exception handlers, device
4539 drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot 4535 drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot
4540 expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU. 4536 expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU.
4541 "RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their 4537 "RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their
4542 parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is 4538 parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is
4543 being started. 4539 being started.
4544 "Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS 4540 "Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS
4545 (Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like 4541 (Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like
4546 RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want 4542 RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want
4547 to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot 4543 to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot
4548 server provides just a single image file, but you want to get 4544 server provides just a single image file, but you want to get
4549 for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image. 4545 for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image.
4550 4546
4551 "Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each 4547 "Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each
4552 image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network 4548 image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network
4553 byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0". 4549 byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0".
4554 Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by 4550 Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by
4555 one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to 4551 one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to
4556 a multiple of 4 bytes). 4552 a multiple of 4 bytes).
4557 4553
4558 "Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like 4554 "Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like
4559 U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to 4555 U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to
4560 flash memory. 4556 flash memory.
4561 4557
4562 "Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by 4558 "Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by
4563 U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially 4559 U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially
4564 useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush) 4560 useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush)
4565 as command interpreter. 4561 as command interpreter.
4566 4562
4567 Booting the Linux zImage: 4563 Booting the Linux zImage:
4568 ------------------------- 4564 -------------------------
4569 4565
4570 On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done 4566 On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done
4571 using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same 4567 using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same
4572 as the syntax of "bootm" command. 4568 as the syntax of "bootm" command.
4573 4569
4574 Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply 4570 Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply
4575 kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the 4571 kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the
4576 address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following 4572 address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following
4577 format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>". 4573 format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>".
4578 4574
4579 4575
4580 Standalone HOWTO: 4576 Standalone HOWTO:
4581 ================= 4577 =================
4582 4578
4583 One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and 4579 One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and
4584 run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of 4580 run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of
4585 U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services. 4581 U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services.
4586 4582
4587 Two simple examples are included with the sources: 4583 Two simple examples are included with the sources:
4588 4584
4589 "Hello World" Demo: 4585 "Hello World" Demo:
4590 ------------------- 4586 -------------------
4591 4587
4592 'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo 4588 'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo
4593 application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot. 4589 application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot.
4594 It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it 4590 It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it
4595 like that: 4591 like that:
4596 4592
4597 => loads 4593 => loads
4598 ## Ready for S-Record download ... 4594 ## Ready for S-Record download ...
4599 ~>examples/hello_world.srec 4595 ~>examples/hello_world.srec
4600 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ... 4596 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
4601 [file transfer complete] 4597 [file transfer complete]
4602 [connected] 4598 [connected]
4603 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004 4599 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004
4604 4600
4605 => go 40004 Hello World! This is a test. 4601 => go 40004 Hello World! This is a test.
4606 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ... 4602 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
4607 Hello World 4603 Hello World
4608 argc = 7 4604 argc = 7
4609 argv[0] = "40004" 4605 argv[0] = "40004"
4610 argv[1] = "Hello" 4606 argv[1] = "Hello"
4611 argv[2] = "World!" 4607 argv[2] = "World!"
4612 argv[3] = "This" 4608 argv[3] = "This"
4613 argv[4] = "is" 4609 argv[4] = "is"
4614 argv[5] = "a" 4610 argv[5] = "a"
4615 argv[6] = "test." 4611 argv[6] = "test."
4616 argv[7] = "<NULL>" 4612 argv[7] = "<NULL>"
4617 Hit any key to exit ... 4613 Hit any key to exit ...
4618 4614
4619 ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0 4615 ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
4620 4616
4621 Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt 4617 Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt
4622 handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'. 4618 handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'.
4623 Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second. 4619 Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second.
4624 The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.' 4620 The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.'
4625 character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be 4621 character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be
4626 controlled by the following keys: 4622 controlled by the following keys:
4627 4623
4628 ? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers 4624 ? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers
4629 b - enable interrupts and start timer 4625 b - enable interrupts and start timer
4630 e - stop timer and disable interrupts 4626 e - stop timer and disable interrupts
4631 q - quit application 4627 q - quit application
4632 4628
4633 => loads 4629 => loads
4634 ## Ready for S-Record download ... 4630 ## Ready for S-Record download ...
4635 ~>examples/timer.srec 4631 ~>examples/timer.srec
4636 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ... 4632 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
4637 [file transfer complete] 4633 [file transfer complete]
4638 [connected] 4634 [connected]
4639 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004 4635 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004
4640 4636
4641 => go 40004 4637 => go 40004
4642 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ... 4638 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
4643 TIMERS=0xfff00980 4639 TIMERS=0xfff00980
4644 Using timer 1 4640 Using timer 1
4645 tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0 4641 tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0
4646 4642
4647 Hit 'b': 4643 Hit 'b':
4648 [q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us 4644 [q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us
4649 Enabling timer 4645 Enabling timer
4650 Hit '?': 4646 Hit '?':
4651 [q, b, e, ?] ........ 4647 [q, b, e, ?] ........
4652 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0 4648 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0
4653 Hit '?': 4649 Hit '?':
4654 [q, b, e, ?] . 4650 [q, b, e, ?] .
4655 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0 4651 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0
4656 Hit '?': 4652 Hit '?':
4657 [q, b, e, ?] . 4653 [q, b, e, ?] .
4658 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0 4654 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0
4659 Hit '?': 4655 Hit '?':
4660 [q, b, e, ?] . 4656 [q, b, e, ?] .
4661 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0 4657 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0
4662 Hit 'e': 4658 Hit 'e':
4663 [q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer 4659 [q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer
4664 Hit 'q': 4660 Hit 'q':
4665 [q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0 4661 [q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
4666 4662
4667 4663
4668 Minicom warning: 4664 Minicom warning:
4669 ================ 4665 ================
4670 4666
4671 Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the 4667 Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the
4672 "minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd) 4668 "minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd)
4673 consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under 4669 consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under
4674 Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and 4670 Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and
4675 especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and 4671 especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and
4676 use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command). See 4672 use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command). See
4677 http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3. 4673 http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3.
4678 for help with kermit. 4674 for help with kermit.
4679 4675
4680 4676
4681 Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this 4677 Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this
4682 configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section: 4678 configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section:
4683 4679
4684 Name Program Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi 4680 Name Program Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi
4685 X kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s Y U Y N N 4681 X kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s Y U Y N N
4686 Y kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r N D Y N N 4682 Y kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r N D Y N N
4687 4683
4688 4684
4689 NetBSD Notes: 4685 NetBSD Notes:
4690 ============= 4686 =============
4691 4687
4692 Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host 4688 Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host
4693 (build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx). 4689 (build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx).
4694 4690
4695 Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on 4691 Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on
4696 NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also 4692 NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also
4697 need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make). 4693 need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make).
4698 Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files; 4694 Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files;
4699 attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is 4695 attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is
4700 missing. This file has to be installed and patched manually: 4696 missing. This file has to be installed and patched manually:
4701 4697
4702 # cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include 4698 # cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include
4703 # mkdir powerpc 4699 # mkdir powerpc
4704 # ln -s powerpc machine 4700 # ln -s powerpc machine
4705 # cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h 4701 # cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h
4706 # ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h ## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST 4702 # ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h ## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST
4707 4703
4708 Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native 4704 Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native
4709 and U-Boot include files. 4705 and U-Boot include files.
4710 4706
4711 Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a 4707 Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a
4712 stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel 4708 stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel
4713 proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source 4709 proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source
4714 tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the 4710 tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the
4715 meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz 4711 meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz
4716 4712
4717 4713
4718 Implementation Internals: 4714 Implementation Internals:
4719 ========================= 4715 =========================
4720 4716
4721 The following is not intended to be a complete description of every 4717 The following is not intended to be a complete description of every
4722 implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the 4718 implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the
4723 inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom 4719 inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom
4724 hardware. 4720 hardware.
4725 4721
4726 4722
4727 Initial Stack, Global Data: 4723 Initial Stack, Global Data:
4728 --------------------------- 4724 ---------------------------
4729 4725
4730 The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot 4726 The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot
4731 starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to 4727 starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to
4732 system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet). 4728 system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet).
4733 This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS 4729 This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS
4734 is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working 4730 is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working
4735 at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation 4731 at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation
4736 options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU 4732 options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU
4737 models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and 4733 models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and
4738 MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be 4734 MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be
4739 locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc. 4735 locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc.
4740 4736
4741 Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the 4737 Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the
4742 U-Boot mailing list: 4738 U-Boot mailing list:
4743 4739
4744 Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)? 4740 Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)?
4745 From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com> 4741 From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com>
4746 Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET) 4742 Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET)
4747 ... 4743 ...
4748 4744
4749 Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it 4745 Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it
4750 is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not 4746 is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not
4751 require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness 4747 require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness
4752 is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of 4748 is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of
4753 necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's 4749 necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's
4754 beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you 4750 beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you
4755 can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and 4751 can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and
4756 operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals. 4752 operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals.
4757 4753
4758 OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It 4754 OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It
4759 is another option for the system designer to use as an 4755 is another option for the system designer to use as an
4760 initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either 4756 initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either
4761 option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your 4757 option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your
4762 board designers haven't used it for something that would 4758 board designers haven't used it for something that would
4763 cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not 4759 cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not
4764 used. 4760 used.
4765 4761
4766 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere 4762 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere
4767 with your processor/board/system design. The default value 4763 with your processor/board/system design. The default value
4768 you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in 4764 you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in
4769 walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger 4765 walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger
4770 than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set 4766 than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set
4771 it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources 4767 it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources
4772 that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in 4768 that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in
4773 start.S has been around a while and should work as is when 4769 start.S has been around a while and should work as is when
4774 you get the config right. 4770 you get the config right.
4775 4771
4776 -Chris Hallinan 4772 -Chris Hallinan
4777 DS4.COM, Inc. 4773 DS4.COM, Inc.
4778 4774
4779 It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C 4775 It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C
4780 code for the initialization procedures: 4776 code for the initialization procedures:
4781 4777
4782 * Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt 4778 * Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt
4783 to write it. 4779 to write it.
4784 4780
4785 * Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitly initialized 4781 * Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitly initialized
4786 as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali- 4782 as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali-
4787 zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM). 4783 zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM).
4788 4784
4789 * Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like 4785 * Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like
4790 that. 4786 that.
4791 4787
4792 Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use 4788 Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use
4793 normal global data to share information between the code. But it 4789 normal global data to share information between the code. But it
4794 turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly 4790 turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly
4795 simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all 4791 simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all
4796 functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_ 4792 functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_
4797 functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of 4793 functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of
4798 the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we 4794 the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we
4799 place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we 4795 place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we
4800 reserve for this purpose. 4796 reserve for this purpose.
4801 4797
4802 When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the 4798 When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the
4803 relevant (E)ABI specifications for the current architecture, and by 4799 relevant (E)ABI specifications for the current architecture, and by
4804 GCC's implementation. 4800 GCC's implementation.
4805 4801
4806 For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use: 4802 For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use:
4807 R1: stack pointer 4803 R1: stack pointer
4808 R2: reserved for system use 4804 R2: reserved for system use
4809 R3-R4: parameter passing and return values 4805 R3-R4: parameter passing and return values
4810 R5-R10: parameter passing 4806 R5-R10: parameter passing
4811 R13: small data area pointer 4807 R13: small data area pointer
4812 R30: GOT pointer 4808 R30: GOT pointer
4813 R31: frame pointer 4809 R31: frame pointer
4814 4810
4815 (U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12 4811 (U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12
4816 is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when 4812 is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when
4817 going back and forth between asm and C) 4813 going back and forth between asm and C)
4818 4814
4819 ==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data 4815 ==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data
4820 4816
4821 Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the 4817 Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the
4822 address of the global data structure is known at compile time), 4818 address of the global data structure is known at compile time),
4823 but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat 4819 but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat
4824 smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on 4820 smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on
4825 average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image, 4821 average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image,
4826 624 text + 127 data). 4822 624 text + 127 data).
4827 4823
4828 On ARM, the following registers are used: 4824 On ARM, the following registers are used:
4829 4825
4830 R0: function argument word/integer result 4826 R0: function argument word/integer result
4831 R1-R3: function argument word 4827 R1-R3: function argument word
4832 R9: platform specific 4828 R9: platform specific
4833 R10: stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled) 4829 R10: stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled)
4834 R11: argument (frame) pointer 4830 R11: argument (frame) pointer
4835 R12: temporary workspace 4831 R12: temporary workspace
4836 R13: stack pointer 4832 R13: stack pointer
4837 R14: link register 4833 R14: link register
4838 R15: program counter 4834 R15: program counter
4839 4835
4840 ==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data 4836 ==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data
4841 4837
4842 Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported. 4838 Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported.
4843 4839
4844 On Nios II, the ABI is documented here: 4840 On Nios II, the ABI is documented here:
4845 http://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf 4841 http://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf
4846 4842
4847 ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data 4843 ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data
4848 4844
4849 Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp 4845 Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp
4850 to access small data sections, so gp is free. 4846 to access small data sections, so gp is free.
4851 4847
4852 On NDS32, the following registers are used: 4848 On NDS32, the following registers are used:
4853 4849
4854 R0-R1: argument/return 4850 R0-R1: argument/return
4855 R2-R5: argument 4851 R2-R5: argument
4856 R15: temporary register for assembler 4852 R15: temporary register for assembler
4857 R16: trampoline register 4853 R16: trampoline register
4858 R28: frame pointer (FP) 4854 R28: frame pointer (FP)
4859 R29: global pointer (GP) 4855 R29: global pointer (GP)
4860 R30: link register (LP) 4856 R30: link register (LP)
4861 R31: stack pointer (SP) 4857 R31: stack pointer (SP)
4862 PC: program counter (PC) 4858 PC: program counter (PC)
4863 4859
4864 ==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data 4860 ==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data
4865 4861
4866 NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope, 4862 NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope,
4867 or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much. 4863 or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much.
4868 4864
4869 On RISC-V, the following registers are used: 4865 On RISC-V, the following registers are used:
4870 4866
4871 x0: hard-wired zero (zero) 4867 x0: hard-wired zero (zero)
4872 x1: return address (ra) 4868 x1: return address (ra)
4873 x2: stack pointer (sp) 4869 x2: stack pointer (sp)
4874 x3: global pointer (gp) 4870 x3: global pointer (gp)
4875 x4: thread pointer (tp) 4871 x4: thread pointer (tp)
4876 x5: link register (t0) 4872 x5: link register (t0)
4877 x8: frame pointer (fp) 4873 x8: frame pointer (fp)
4878 x10-x11: arguments/return values (a0-1) 4874 x10-x11: arguments/return values (a0-1)
4879 x12-x17: arguments (a2-7) 4875 x12-x17: arguments (a2-7)
4880 x28-31: temporaries (t3-6) 4876 x28-31: temporaries (t3-6)
4881 pc: program counter (pc) 4877 pc: program counter (pc)
4882 4878
4883 ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data 4879 ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data
4884 4880
4885 Memory Management: 4881 Memory Management:
4886 ------------------ 4882 ------------------
4887 4883
4888 U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the 4884 U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the
4889 MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection. 4885 MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection.
4890 4886
4891 The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory 4887 The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory
4892 controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each 4888 controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each
4893 memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several 4889 memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several
4894 physical memory banks. 4890 physical memory banks.
4895 4891
4896 U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on 4892 U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on
4897 TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After 4893 TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After
4898 booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself 4894 booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself
4899 to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some 4895 to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some
4900 memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN 4896 memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN
4901 configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board 4897 configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board
4902 Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward). 4898 Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward).
4903 4899
4904 Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB 4900 Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB
4905 of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF). 4901 of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF).
4906 4902
4907 So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like 4903 So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like
4908 this: 4904 this:
4909 4905
4910 0x0000 0000 Exception Vector code 4906 0x0000 0000 Exception Vector code
4911 : 4907 :
4912 0x0000 1FFF 4908 0x0000 1FFF
4913 0x0000 2000 Free for Application Use 4909 0x0000 2000 Free for Application Use
4914 : 4910 :
4915 : 4911 :
4916 4912
4917 : 4913 :
4918 : 4914 :
4919 0x00FB FF20 Monitor Stack (Growing downward) 4915 0x00FB FF20 Monitor Stack (Growing downward)
4920 0x00FB FFAC Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data 4916 0x00FB FFAC Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data
4921 0x00FC 0000 Malloc Arena 4917 0x00FC 0000 Malloc Arena
4922 : 4918 :
4923 0x00FD FFFF 4919 0x00FD FFFF
4924 0x00FE 0000 RAM Copy of Monitor Code 4920 0x00FE 0000 RAM Copy of Monitor Code
4925 ... eventually: LCD or video framebuffer 4921 ... eventually: LCD or video framebuffer
4926 ... eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset) 4922 ... eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset)
4927 0x00FF FFFF [End of RAM] 4923 0x00FF FFFF [End of RAM]
4928 4924
4929 4925
4930 System Initialization: 4926 System Initialization:
4931 ---------------------- 4927 ----------------------
4932 4928
4933 In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point 4929 In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point
4934 (on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset 4930 (on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset
4935 configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the on board Flash memory. 4931 configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the on board Flash memory.
4936 To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address. 4932 To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address.
4937 To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!) 4933 To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!)
4938 initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs 4934 initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs
4939 which provide such a feature like), or in a locked part of the data 4935 which provide such a feature like), or in a locked part of the data
4940 cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core, the caches and 4936 cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core, the caches and
4941 the SIU. 4937 the SIU.
4942 4938
4943 Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a 4939 Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a
4944 preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries 4940 preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries
4945 (multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash 4941 (multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash
4946 on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is 4942 on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is
4947 programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a 4943 programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a
4948 simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM 4944 simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM
4949 banks. 4945 banks.
4950 4946
4951 When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of 4947 When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of
4952 different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first 4948 different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first
4953 bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address 4949 bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address
4954 0x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create 4950 0x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create
4955 contiguous memory starting from 0. 4951 contiguous memory starting from 0.
4956 4952
4957 Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area 4953 Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area
4958 and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board 4954 and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board
4959 Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM 4955 Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM
4960 pages, and the final stack is set up. 4956 pages, and the final stack is set up.
4961 4957
4962 Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment; 4958 Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment;
4963 until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are 4959 until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are
4964 running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a 4960 running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a
4965 new address in RAM. 4961 new address in RAM.
4966 4962
4967 4963
4968 U-Boot Porting Guide: 4964 U-Boot Porting Guide:
4969 ---------------------- 4965 ----------------------
4970 4966
4971 [Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing 4967 [Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing
4972 list, October 2002] 4968 list, October 2002]
4973 4969
4974 4970
4975 int main(int argc, char *argv[]) 4971 int main(int argc, char *argv[])
4976 { 4972 {
4977 sighandler_t no_more_time; 4973 sighandler_t no_more_time;
4978 4974
4979 signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time); 4975 signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time);
4980 alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK)); 4976 alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK));
4981 4977
4982 if (available_money > available_manpower) { 4978 if (available_money > available_manpower) {
4983 Pay consultant to port U-Boot; 4979 Pay consultant to port U-Boot;
4984 return 0; 4980 return 0;
4985 } 4981 }
4986 4982
4987 Download latest U-Boot source; 4983 Download latest U-Boot source;
4988 4984
4989 Subscribe to u-boot mailing list; 4985 Subscribe to u-boot mailing list;
4990 4986
4991 if (clueless) 4987 if (clueless)
4992 email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?"); 4988 email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?");
4993 4989
4994 while (learning) { 4990 while (learning) {
4995 Read the README file in the top level directory; 4991 Read the README file in the top level directory;
4996 Read http://www.denx.de/twiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual; 4992 Read http://www.denx.de/twiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual;
4997 Read applicable doc/*.README; 4993 Read applicable doc/*.README;
4998 Read the source, Luke; 4994 Read the source, Luke;
4999 /* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */ 4995 /* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */
5000 } 4996 }
5001 4997
5002 if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500)) 4998 if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500))
5003 Buy a BDI3000; 4999 Buy a BDI3000;
5004 else 5000 else
5005 Add a lot of aggravation and time; 5001 Add a lot of aggravation and time;
5006 5002
5007 if (a similar board exists) { /* hopefully... */ 5003 if (a similar board exists) { /* hopefully... */
5008 cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard> 5004 cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard>
5009 cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h 5005 cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h
5010 } else { 5006 } else {
5011 Create your own board support subdirectory; 5007 Create your own board support subdirectory;
5012 Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file; 5008 Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file;
5013 } 5009 }
5014 Edit new board/<myboard> files 5010 Edit new board/<myboard> files
5015 Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h 5011 Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h
5016 5012
5017 while (!accepted) { 5013 while (!accepted) {
5018 while (!running) { 5014 while (!running) {
5019 do { 5015 do {
5020 Add / modify source code; 5016 Add / modify source code;
5021 } until (compiles); 5017 } until (compiles);
5022 Debug; 5018 Debug;
5023 if (clueless) 5019 if (clueless)
5024 email("Hi, I am having problems..."); 5020 email("Hi, I am having problems...");
5025 } 5021 }
5026 Send patch file to the U-Boot email list; 5022 Send patch file to the U-Boot email list;
5027 if (reasonable critiques) 5023 if (reasonable critiques)
5028 Incorporate improvements from email list code review; 5024 Incorporate improvements from email list code review;
5029 else 5025 else
5030 Defend code as written; 5026 Defend code as written;
5031 } 5027 }
5032 5028
5033 return 0; 5029 return 0;
5034 } 5030 }
5035 5031
5036 void no_more_time (int sig) 5032 void no_more_time (int sig)
5037 { 5033 {
5038 hire_a_guru(); 5034 hire_a_guru();
5039 } 5035 }
5040 5036
5041 5037
5042 Coding Standards: 5038 Coding Standards:
5043 ----------------- 5039 -----------------
5044 5040
5045 All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel 5041 All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel
5046 coding style; see the kernel coding style guide at 5042 coding style; see the kernel coding style guide at
5047 https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/process/coding-style.html, and the 5043 https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/process/coding-style.html, and the
5048 script "scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory. 5044 script "scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory.
5049 5045
5050 Source files originating from a different project (for example the 5046 Source files originating from a different project (for example the
5051 MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not 5047 MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not
5052 reformatted to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those 5048 reformatted to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those
5053 sources. 5049 sources.
5054 5050
5055 Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in 5051 Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in
5056 Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//) 5052 Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//)
5057 in your code. 5053 in your code.
5058 5054
5059 Please also stick to the following formatting rules: 5055 Please also stick to the following formatting rules:
5060 - remove any trailing white space 5056 - remove any trailing white space
5061 - use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces 5057 - use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces
5062 - make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds 5058 - make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds
5063 - do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files 5059 - do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files
5064 - do not add trailing empty lines to source files 5060 - do not add trailing empty lines to source files
5065 5061
5066 Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned 5062 Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned
5067 with a request to reformat the changes. 5063 with a request to reformat the changes.
5068 5064
5069 5065
5070 Submitting Patches: 5066 Submitting Patches:
5071 ------------------- 5067 -------------------
5072 5068
5073 Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to 5069 Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to
5074 establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules 5070 establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules
5075 may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff. 5071 may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff.
5076 5072
5077 Please see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details. 5073 Please see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details.
5078 5074
5079 Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>; 5075 Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>;
5080 see https://lists.denx.de/listinfo/u-boot 5076 see https://lists.denx.de/listinfo/u-boot
5081 5077
5082 When you send a patch, please include the following information with 5078 When you send a patch, please include the following information with
5083 it: 5079 it:
5084 5080
5085 * For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes 5081 * For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes
5086 this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the 5082 this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the
5087 patch actually fixes something. 5083 patch actually fixes something.
5088 5084
5089 * For new features: a description of the feature and your 5085 * For new features: a description of the feature and your
5090 implementation. 5086 implementation.
5091 5087
5092 * A CHANGELOG entry as plaintext (separate from the patch) 5088 * A CHANGELOG entry as plaintext (separate from the patch)
5093 5089
5094 * For major contributions, add a MAINTAINERS file with your 5090 * For major contributions, add a MAINTAINERS file with your
5095 information and associated file and directory references. 5091 information and associated file and directory references.
5096 5092
5097 * When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a 5093 * When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a
5098 maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too. 5094 maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too.
5099 5095
5100 * If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to 5096 * If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to
5101 document these in the README file. 5097 document these in the README file.
5102 5098
5103 * The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly* 5099 * The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly*
5104 recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the 5100 recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the
5105 "git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to 5101 "git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to
5106 the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems 5102 the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems
5107 with some other mail clients. 5103 with some other mail clients.
5108 5104
5109 If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of 5105 If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of
5110 diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of 5106 diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of
5111 GNU diff. 5107 GNU diff.
5112 5108
5113 The current directory when running this command shall be the parent 5109 The current directory when running this command shall be the parent
5114 directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that 5110 directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that
5115 your patch includes sufficient directory information for the 5111 your patch includes sufficient directory information for the
5116 affected files). 5112 affected files).
5117 5113
5118 We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged, 5114 We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged,
5119 and compressed attachments must not be used. 5115 and compressed attachments must not be used.
5120 5116
5121 * If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several 5117 * If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several
5122 files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file. 5118 files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file.
5123 5119
5124 * Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be 5120 * Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be
5125 submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset. 5121 submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset.
5126 5122
5127 5123
5128 Notes: 5124 Notes:
5129 5125
5130 * Before sending the patch, run the buildman script on your patched 5126 * Before sending the patch, run the buildman script on your patched
5131 source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported 5127 source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported
5132 for any of the boards. 5128 for any of the boards.
5133 5129
5134 * Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch 5130 * Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch
5135 containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be 5131 containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be
5136 returned with a request to re-formatting / split it. 5132 returned with a request to re-formatting / split it.
5137 5133
5138 * If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not 5134 * If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not
5139 add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful! 5135 add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful!
5140 When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only 5136 When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only
5141 (using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature 5137 (using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature
5142 disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your 5138 disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your
5143 modification. 5139 modification.
5144 5140
5145 * Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the 5141 * Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the
5146 u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are 5142 u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are
5147 reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches 5143 reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches
5148 bigger than the size limit should be avoided. 5144 bigger than the size limit should be avoided.
5149 5145
drivers/bootcount/Kconfig
1 # 1 #
2 # Boot count configuration 2 # Boot count configuration
3 # 3 #
4 4
5 menuconfig BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT 5 menuconfig BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT
6 bool "Enable support for checking boot count limit" 6 bool "Enable support for checking boot count limit"
7 help 7 help
8 Enable checking for exceeding the boot count limit. 8 Enable checking for exceeding the boot count limit.
9 More information: http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit 9 More information: http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit
10 10
11 if BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT 11 if BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT
12 12
13 choice 13 choice
14 prompt "Boot count device" 14 prompt "Boot count device"
15 default BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX if AM33XX || SOC_DA8XX 15 default BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX if AM33XX || SOC_DA8XX
16 default BOOTCOUNT_AT91 if AT91SAM9XE
16 17
17 config BOOTCOUNT_EXT 18 config BOOTCOUNT_EXT
18 bool "Boot counter on EXT filesystem" 19 bool "Boot counter on EXT filesystem"
19 help 20 help
20 Add support for maintaining boot count in a file on an EXT 21 Add support for maintaining boot count in a file on an EXT
21 filesystem. 22 filesystem.
22 23
23 config BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX 24 config BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX
24 bool "Boot counter in AM33XX RTC IP block" 25 bool "Boot counter in AM33XX RTC IP block"
25 depends on AM33XX || SOC_DA8XX 26 depends on AM33XX || SOC_DA8XX
26 help 27 help
27 A bootcount driver for the RTC IP block found on many TI platforms. 28 A bootcount driver for the RTC IP block found on many TI platforms.
28 This requires the RTC clocks, etc, to be enabled prior to use and 29 This requires the RTC clocks, etc, to be enabled prior to use and
29 not all boards with this IP block on it will have the RTC in use. 30 not all boards with this IP block on it will have the RTC in use.
30 31
31 config BOOTCOUNT_ENV 32 config BOOTCOUNT_ENV
32 bool "Boot counter in environment" 33 bool "Boot counter in environment"
33 help 34 help
34 If no softreset save registers are found on the hardware 35 If no softreset save registers are found on the hardware
35 "bootcount" is stored in the environment. To prevent a 36 "bootcount" is stored in the environment. To prevent a
36 saveenv on all reboots, the environment variable 37 saveenv on all reboots, the environment variable
37 "upgrade_available" is used. If "upgrade_available" is 38 "upgrade_available" is used. If "upgrade_available" is
38 0, "bootcount" is always 0, if "upgrade_available" is 39 0, "bootcount" is always 0, if "upgrade_available" is
39 1 "bootcount" is incremented in the environment. 40 1 "bootcount" is incremented in the environment.
40 So the Userspace Application must set the "upgrade_available" 41 So the Userspace Application must set the "upgrade_available"
41 and "bootcount" variable to 0, if a boot was successfully. 42 and "bootcount" variable to 0, if a boot was successfully.
42 43
43 config BOOTCOUNT_RAM 44 config BOOTCOUNT_RAM
44 bool "Boot counter in RAM" 45 bool "Boot counter in RAM"
45 help 46 help
46 Store the bootcount in DRAM protected against against bit errors 47 Store the bootcount in DRAM protected against against bit errors
47 due to short power loss or holding a system in RESET. 48 due to short power loss or holding a system in RESET.
48 49
49 config BOOTCOUNT_I2C 50 config BOOTCOUNT_I2C
50 bool "Boot counter on I2C device" 51 bool "Boot counter on I2C device"
51 help 52 help
52 Enable support for the bootcounter on an i2c (like RTC) device. 53 Enable support for the bootcounter on an i2c (like RTC) device.
53 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RTC_ADDR = i2c chip address 54 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RTC_ADDR = i2c chip address
54 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR = i2c addr which is used for 55 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR = i2c addr which is used for
55 the bootcounter. 56 the bootcounter.
56 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ALEN = address len 57 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ALEN = address len
58
59 config BOOTCOUNT_AT91
60 bool "Boot counter for Atmel AT91SAM9XE"
61 depends on AT91SAM9XE
57 62
58 endchoice 63 endchoice
59 64
60 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_SINGLEWORD 65 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_SINGLEWORD
61 bool "Use single word to pack boot count and magic value" 66 bool "Use single word to pack boot count and magic value"
62 help 67 help
63 This option enables packing boot count magic value and boot count 68 This option enables packing boot count magic value and boot count
64 into single word (32 bits). 69 into single word (32 bits).
65 70
66 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_INTERFACE 71 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_INTERFACE
67 string "Interface on which to find boot counter EXT filesystem" 72 string "Interface on which to find boot counter EXT filesystem"
68 default "mmc" 73 default "mmc"
69 depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT 74 depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT
70 help 75 help
71 Set the interface to use when locating the filesystem to use for the 76 Set the interface to use when locating the filesystem to use for the
72 boot counter. 77 boot counter.
73 78
74 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_DEVPART 79 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_DEVPART
75 string "Partition of the boot counter EXT filesystem" 80 string "Partition of the boot counter EXT filesystem"
76 default "0:1" 81 default "0:1"
77 depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT 82 depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT
78 help 83 help
79 Set the partition to use when locating the filesystem to use for the 84 Set the partition to use when locating the filesystem to use for the
80 boot counter. 85 boot counter.
81 86
82 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_NAME 87 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_NAME
83 string "Path and filename of the EXT filesystem based boot counter" 88 string "Path and filename of the EXT filesystem based boot counter"
84 default "/boot/failures" 89 default "/boot/failures"
85 depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT 90 depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT
86 help 91 help
87 Set the filename and path of the file used to store the boot counter. 92 Set the filename and path of the file used to store the boot counter.
88 93
89 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR 94 config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR
90 hex "RAM address used for reading and writing the boot counter" 95 hex "RAM address used for reading and writing the boot counter"
91 default 0x7000A000 96 default 0x7000A000
92 depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT 97 depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT
93 help 98 help
94 Set the address used for reading and writing the boot counter. 99 Set the address used for reading and writing the boot counter.
95 100
96 endif 101 endif
97 102
drivers/bootcount/Makefile
1 # 1 #
2 # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2 # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
3 # 3 #
4 4
5 obj-y += bootcount.o 5 obj-y += bootcount.o
6 obj-$(CONFIG_AT91SAM9XE) += bootcount_at91.o 6 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_AT91) += bootcount_at91.o
7 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX) += bootcount_davinci.o 7 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX) += bootcount_davinci.o
8 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_RAM) += bootcount_ram.o 8 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_RAM) += bootcount_ram.o
9 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ENV) += bootcount_env.o 9 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ENV) += bootcount_env.o
10 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_I2C) += bootcount_i2c.o 10 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_I2C) += bootcount_i2c.o
11 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_EXT) += bootcount_ext.o 11 obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_EXT) += bootcount_ext.o
12 12